HomeMy WebLinkAbout2525 EL CAMINO REAL; 105; FPC2017-0124; Permitity of
Carlsbad
Print Date: 12/13/2021 Permit No: FPC2017-0124
Job Address: 2525 EL CAMINO REAL, # 105, CARLSBAD, CA 92008-1206 Status: Closed - Finaled
Permit Type: FIRE-Construction Commercial Work Class: Fixed Extinguishing Syste
Parcel #: 1563020900 Track #: Applied: 05/11/2017
Valuation: $646,960.18 Lot #: Issued: 09/27/2017
Occupancy Group: Project #: Finaled Close Out: 02/01/2021
#of Dwelling Units: Plan #:
Bedrooms: Construction Type:
Bathrooms: Orig. Plan Check U: Inspector:
Plan Check U: Final Inspection:
Project Title:
Description: CHEESECAKE FACTORY -HOOD AND DUCT ANSUL SYSTEM (2)
FPContractor:
V FIRE SYSTEMS CORPORATION
P0 BOX 13275
SAN BERNARDINO, CA 92423-0000
(909) 947-5055
FEE AMOUNT
FIRE Hood & Duct Extinguishing System Initial Sys $198.00
FIRE Hood & Duct Extinguishing System Initial Sys $404.00
Total Fees: $602.00 Total Payments To Date: $602.00 Balance Due: $0.00
Fire Department Page 1 of 1
1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad CA 92008-7314 1 760-602-4665 760-602-8561 f I www.carlsbadca.gov
lu
IIIi
FPC20I7-0124
2525 EL CAMINO REAL
UNITIO5
—
SECTION II— SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 2-1
7-1-09 REV. 4
TOTAL SYSTEM
There are four types of R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression
Systems:
Single-tank System
Double-tank System
' 3. Three-tank System (1 Cartridge)
4. Multiple Tank System (Three Tanks or More - Multiple
Cartridges)
The type of system required for the particular installation will be
determined through the guidelines covered in "System Design."
Additional equipment which may be required to complete the sys-
tem design is explained in the "System Components" section.
Additional devices covered are: remote manual pull stations,
mechanical and electrical gas shut-off valves, electrical switches,
and pressure switches.
Single-Tank System
The R-102 single-tank system is available with a stainless steel
enclosure and consists of:
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical
or Mechanical)
Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
Discharge Nozzles
Detection Components
Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup,
and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detection system
and additional equipment. Refer to "System Components" section
for individual component descriptions.
FIGURE 1
000133
Double-Tank System
The R-1 02 double-tank system is available with stainless steel
enclosures and consists of:
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical
or Mechanical)
Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
Enclosure or Bracket Assembly
Discharge Nozzles
Detection Components
Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup,
and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant piping,
detection system, and additional equipment.
The enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant
gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the
system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual com-
ponent descriptions.
FIGURE 2
008321
0
SECTION II— SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 2-2
REV. 5 7-1-09
TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued)
Three-Tank System (1 Cartridge with Three (3) 3.0 Gal Tanks
ONLY)
The R-102 three-tank system is available with stainless steel
enclosures and consists of:
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical
or Mechanical)
Double Tank Enclosure Assembly
Nitrogen Cartridge
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
Discharge Nozzles
Detection Components
Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup,
and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant piping,
detection system, and additional equipment.
The double tank enclosure assembly is mounted separately but
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant
gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the
system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual com-
ponent descriptions.
FIGURE 3
008322
Multiple Tank System (Three (3) Tanks or More - Multiple
Cartridges)
The R-102 multiple-tank system is available with stainless steel
enclosures and consists of:
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly
(Electrical or Mechanical) or ANSUL AUTOMAN Remote
Release Assembly(ies)
Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s)
Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies)
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
Enclosure or Bracket Assembly(ies)
Discharge Nozzles
Detection Components
Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup,
and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping,
expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment.
The remote release assembly(ies) is used in large systems or
multi-hood systems to actuate regulated actuator assembly(ies)
ONLY. The remote release assembly contains a release mecha-
nism (unregulated), with enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing
the actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and addi-
tional equipment.
Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but with-
in the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actuation/
expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actua-
tion of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic actuator,
regulator, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup,
and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant piping.
Each enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly or regulat-
ed actuator assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure
simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System
Components" section for individual component descriptions.
FIGURE 4
008323
0
SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 1-1
7-1-09 REV. 6
S DESIGN AND APPLICATION
The ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System is
designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appli-
ances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre-engineered group of mechan-
ical and electrical components for installation by an authorized
ANSUL distributor. The basic system consists of an ANSUL
AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regulat-
ed release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank housed
within a single enclosure. Nozzles, detectors, cartridges, liquid
agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are supplied in
separate packages in the quantities needed for each fire suppres-
sion system arrangement.
The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated
manually through a remote manual pull station. The system is also
capable of shutting down appliances at system actuation. For
appliance shutdown requirements, refer to the current version of
NFPA 17A, "Standard For Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems,"
and NFPA 96, "Standard For Ventilation Control and Fire
Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations."
Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station,
mechanical and electrical gas valves, and electrical switches for
automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. Accessories can be
added, such as alarms, warning lights, etc., to installations where
required.
The R-102 system suppresses fire by spraying the plenum area,
the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with a
predetermined flow rate of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
S grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap-like foam on the
Suppressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cooking
appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with the hot
surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between the hot
grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the escape of
combustible vapors.
Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The forced
draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid agent
through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire suppression
process. These fans also provide a cooling effect in the plenum
and duct after the fire suppression system has been discharged.
The system is UL listed with or without fan operation.
- Make up or supply air fans, integral to the exhaust hood(s) being
protected, shall be shut down upon system actuation.
Along with the fire suppression system, the total system design
must include hand portable fire extinguisher(s) located within the
cooking/restaurant area that can be used to manually suppress a
fire that may be burning in an unprotected area. Class K extin-
guisher(s) must be provided for hazards where there is a potential
for fires involving combustible cooking media (vegetable or animal
oils and fats). Refer to NFPA 10, "Standard For Portable Fire
Extinguisher," for additional information.
UL LISTING
The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been tested
and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-engi-
neered system. The system is in compliance with ULTest
Standard 300. These tests require extinguishment of fires which
are initiated in deep fat fryers, ranges, griddles, char-broilers,
woks, upright broilers, chain-broilers, filters, plenum chambers,
hoods, and ducts after pre-loading each appliance with a pre-
scribed amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to progress
to maximum intensity before the fire suppression system is
actuated.
SYSTEM APPROVALS
UL EX3470
ULC EX3470
MEA 59-95E
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Actuation Gas Line: Piping and/or stainless steel braided hose
assemblies from the ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release
Assembly which supplies high pressure nitrogen or carbon dioxide
to the Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple-tank system actu-
ation.
Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent.
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical):
An assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism,
agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose, solenoid, and
electric switch within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains
knockouts to facilitate component hookups.
ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechani-
cal): An assembly which contains the regulated release mecha-
nism, agent tank (ordered separately), and expellant gas hose
within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to
facilitate component hookups.
Authority Having Jurisdiction: The "authority having jurisdiction"
is the organization, office, or individual responsible for "approving"
equipment, an installation, or a procedure. The phrase "Authority
Having Jurisdiction" is used in a broad manner since jurisdictions
and "approval" agencies vary as do their responsibilities. Where
public safety is primary, the "authority having jurisdiction" may be
a federal, state, local, or other regional department or individual
such as a fire chief, fire marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau,
labor department, health department, building official, electrical
inspector, or others having statutory authority. For insurance pur-
poses, an insurance company representative may be the "author-
ity having jurisdiction." In many circumstances the property owner
or his designated agent assumes the role of the "authority having
jurisdiction;" at government installations, the commanding officer
or departmental official may be the "authority having jurisdiction."
Blow-Off Cap: A siliconized rubber or metal cap which covers the
end of the nozzle to protect the nozzle tip and minimize cooking
grease migration into the nozzle orifice.
Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the
supply line to the nozzle(s).
Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which mini-
mizes the remote chance of siphoning of the agent into the dis-
charge piping during extreme temperature variations.
Cartridge: A hermetically sealed, steel pressure vessel containing
nitrogen or carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the agent tank.
Cooking Appliance: Includes fryers, griddles, ranges, upright
broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal broilers, or char-broilers
(electric, lava rock, gas-radiant, or mesquite).
Cooking Area: Cooking area is defined as the maximum surface
that requires protection. Each type of appliance has a defined
cooking area with parameters that vary for each appliance. For
example, the cooking area for a griddle is the entire flat cooking
surface, while a fryer may have two areas that need consideration,
depending on whether the fryer has a dripboard or not.
Conduit Offset Assembly: A pre-formed piece of conduit which
can be installed between the ANSUL regulated release and the
conduit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and
remote manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient
manner.
SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 1-2
REV. 6 7-1-09
DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued)
Depth: When referring to depth as a linear dimension, it is the
horizontal dimension measured from front to back of the appliance
or plenum.
Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector
linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire
suppression system.
Detector Linkage: A device used to support the fusible link.
Discharge Hose Assembly: An agent distribution hose to be
used with castered cooking appliances with castered supports to
allow the movement of the appliance for service or cleaning pur-
poses.
Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing agent
from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply or Branch
lines.
Ducts (or Duct System): A continuous passageway for the trans-
mission of air and vapors which, in addition to the containment
components themselves, may include duct fittings, dampers, duct
filters, duct transitions, in-line or end-duct pollution control units
(PCUs), and/or other items or air handling equipment.
Electrostatic Precipitator: A device used to aid in the cleaning of
the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near the
base of the ventilation duct or may be included as an integral part
of a pollution control unit (PCU).
Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the nitro-
gen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release assembly/
regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank.
Flexible Conduit: A flexible means to route stainless steel cable
from the ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release to a manual pull
station or mechanical gas valve.
Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow
capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks
needed to cover a certain group of hazards.
Fusible Links: A fixed temperature heat detecting device
employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until its
designed temperature is reached, allowing separation of the link
and system operation.
Gas Valve: An electrically or mechanically operated device used
to shut off the gas supply to the cooking equipment when the sys-
tem is actuated.
Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release
mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically
unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve to
close upon system actuation.
High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz-
zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and cap-
ture grease-laden vapors and exhaust gases from cooking appli-
ances. It shall be constructed in a manner which meets the
requirements of NFPA 96.
Liquid Agent: A potassium-based solution used for the knock-
down and suppression of fire.
Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz-
zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum dimen-
sion, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle.
Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of fit-
tings which must not be exceeded for each system.
Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the 0
nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required
between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a griddle,
range, or fryer.
Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a spe-
cific flow rate and stream pattern.
Overlapping Protection: When discharge nozzles are spaced
equally apart over one or more appliances requiring protection.
Nozzles used in this manner provide area protection of eligible
appliances within the protected area. Two types of overlapping pro-
tection is available: full hood continuous protection and group pro-
tection. Overlapping protection is in addition to appliance specific
coverages.
Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of the
hood above the filters.
Pre-engineered System: NFPA 17A defines a pre-engineered
system as one which has "...predetermined flow rates, nozzle
pressures, and quantities of liquid agent." The R-1 02 system, as
prescribed by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), has specific pipe
sizes, maximum and minimum pipe lengths and numbers of fit-
tings, and number and types of nozzles. The hazards protected by
this system are also specifically limited as to type and size by UL
based upon actual fire tests. All limitations on hazards that can be
protected and piping and nozzle configurations are contained in
the R-102 installation and maintenance manual which is part of
the UL listing.
Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire
rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism and
the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the mechan-
ical gas valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism and the
remote manual pull station.
Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of two wire
ropes which run from a regulated release or a regulated actuator
to two remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated releases
or regulated actuators to a single mechanical gas valve or from
one regulated release or regulated actuator to two gas valves.
Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains the
regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank, and expellant gas hose
within a metal enclosure. This assembly is used to pressurize addi-
tional agent tanks in a multiple tank system.
Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within the
ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases
the expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices
when signaled automatically by a detector or manually with a
remote pull station.
Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the nitro-
gen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is actuated.
Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual
actuation of the system from a remote location.
Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the upright
broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling of meats
and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most contain a
removable grease drip tray.
Series Detector: Any detector located in-line between the regu-
lated release assembly and the terminal detector.
Silicone Lubricant: A heat-resistant organic compound used to
lubricate 0-rings, rubber and mechanical components.
Supply Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the
agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch lines.
SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 1-3
7-1-09 REV.0
DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued)
Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only
detector used in a single-detector system. This detector is thus
named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends,
or 'terminates." There is only one terminal detector per detection
system.
Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows for
the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between the
hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct.
Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build-up within the
agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature
fluctuations.
S
0
SECTION I - GENERAL INFORMATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 1-4
REV. 0 7-1-09
NOTES: .
U
U
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-1
7-1-09 REV. 6
S
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon - Part No.
79694 or 3.0 gallon - Part No. 79372) is a potassium-based solu-
tion designed for fast knock-down and suppression of grease-
related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers which pro-
vide one complete tank charge. (Refer to Section V, Page 5-2.1, for
maximum agent fill capacity.) Agent storage life expectancy is
twelve years and can be stored at a temperature of —40 OF to 130
OF (-40°C to 54°C). Note: When installing agent in R-102 sys-
tem, temperature range is 32 OF (0 °C) to 130 OF (54 °C). The
distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment
receipt to be filed with each installation record.
ANSULEX" LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT
3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON
SHIPPING WT. 35 LB (16 kg) SHIPPING WE 19 LB (9 kg)
000136 000137
FIGURE 1
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL)
The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly
(Part No. 429853) contains the regulated release mechanism,
expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knock-
outs to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detec-
tion system; and additional equipment. This regulated release
assembly is used in single, double, and multiple-tank systems and
must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can
be used to interconnect both the actuation and expellant gas lines
as required per system design. The regulator is designed to allow
a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi (7.6 bar) when the
system is actuated. The agent tank must be ordered separately.
In single, double, and multiple-tank systems, the provided expel-
lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the
regulator. In double and multiple-tank system configurations, the
back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed for
one additional tank-enclosure or tank-bracket hookup. The enclo-
sure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this connection.
If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fit-
tings are required.
The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains an
adaptorltube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc
helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to significant
temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. The
tank is stainless steel and, under normal conditions, requires
hydrostatic testing every twelve years.
The detection and additional equipment required per system
design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure
contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups.
The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic
actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system
separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the system
occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station
pull ring.
"ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
(MECHANICAL)
NOTE:
FIGURE 2
000138
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL)
The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly
(Part No. 429856) is identical to the mechanical version except it
also contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical
switch.
The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the release
mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the solenoid by
opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system is fired.
Additional electrical switches can be added as required for auto-
matic equipment and gas shut-oft accessories, as well as initiating
audible and visual alarms.
"ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
(ELECTRICAL)*
NC
SWITCH
SOLENOID
FIGURE 3
000139
* NOTE: ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release, Part No. 429856, is not
intended to be used with electric detection.
The tank bracket is constructed of mild steel and painted red. It is
designed for mounting the tank in a minimum amount of space.
The Bracket Assembly can only be utilized with 3.0 gallon tanks
(Part No. 429862).
S
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
BRACKET
SHIPPING WI 7 LB (3 kg)
FIGURE 6
000141
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
The Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 429850) contains the
regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose for agent tank
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant pip-
ing. This assembly is used in multiple-tank systems and must be
mounted to a rigid surface.
The regulator contains two outlets 1350 apart. One outlet is used
to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed agent tank.
The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to an additional
enclosure or bracket assembly. The regulator is designed to allow
a constant flow of nitrogen into each agent tank connected (two
o. tanks maximum) at 110 psi (7.6 bar).
The pneumatic actuator is designed to puncture the expellant gas
cartridge seal upon receivi 1ci pressure from the regulated release
assembly actuation piping. The enclosure contains a knockout to
facilitate distribution piping hookup.
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
NOTE: AGENT TANK
MUST BE
ORDERED
SEPARATELY
OR SEE PAGE 3-4
1-1
PNEUMATIC
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATOR
ING WT.
(9 kg) •
FIGURE 7
000143
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-2
REV.6 7-1-09
REMOTE MECHANICAL RELEASE
The Remote Mechanical Release, Part No. 433485, is used to
actuate up to five (5) R-102 regulated actuators. The remote
mechanical release utilizes a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge as
the actuation pressure to operate the regulated actuators. The
release is housed in a stainless steel enclosure.
RELEASE
MECHANISM
SHIPPING WEIGHT: I
20 LB (9.1 kg)
0 '..__' 0
FIGURE 4
007498
SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
The Single Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429870) is used in
double and multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid
surface near the regulated release or regulated actuator assembly
its expellent gas line will be connected to.
The enclosure is designed for mounting either a 1.5 gallon (Part
No. 429864) or a 3.0 gallon tank (Part No. 429862) in a minimum
amount of space.
ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST
BE ORDERED
SEPARATELY
OR SEE PAGE 3-4
MOUNTING
ENCLOSURE
SHIPPING WT.
13 LB (6 kg) is
FIGURE 5
000142
RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY
The Bracket Assembly (Part No. 429878) is used in double and
multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near
the regulated release assembly or regulated actuator assembly
that its expellant gas line will be connected to.
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-3
4-1-06 REV. 8
S AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
S
The agent tank shipping assembly (3-Gallon, Part No. 429862,
and 1.5 Gallon, Part No. 429864) consists of a stainless steel tank
and an adaptor/tube assembly. The adaptor/tube assembly con-
tains a burst disc. The burst disc prevents agent leakage due to
significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is
located. Under normal conditions, the tank requires hydrostatic
testing every twelve years. The date of manufacture is stamped, on
the tank nameplate.
The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with only
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation.
:ADAPTOR/
ASSEMBLY
3 GALLON
SHIPPING WT.
7 LB (3 kg)
1.5 GALLON
SHIPPING WT.
5 LB (2 kg)
AGENT
TANK
FIGURE 8
000140
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
(FOR OEM IN-CABINET USE ONLY)
The OEM Regulated Mechanical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part
No. 79493, contains the same regulated release mechanism as
the standard ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly.
The OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part
No. 418054*, is identical to the mechanical version except it con-
tains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch.
These release/bracket assemblies must be installed in a suitable
equipment enclosure either horizontally or vertically. They contain
all the necessary mounting and conduit holes needed to fully
install the assembly. The agent tank is installed separately and
need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled. Note: OEM
Release/Bracket Assembly must be installed high enough in cabi-
net so that there is sufficient room to install and remove cartridge.
Note: OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 418054, is
not intended to be used with electric detection.
RELEASE
MECHANISt
REGULAr
FIGURE 9
000144
The OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly, Part No. 418691,
includes the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose and
OEM bracket. Also available is an OEM Regulated Actuator
Assembly with all the above mentioned components except for the
bracket. This assembly is Part No. 418522.
SHIPPING WT. 4 LB (2 kg)
FIGURE 10
002225
TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
The Two Tank Enclosure Assembly, Part No. 429872, consists of
two expellant gas hoses, two grommets, and the mounting enclo-
sure. The assembly is used in 9 gallon systems. It can be coupled
with a 3-gallon regulated release assembly or a 3-gallon regulated
actuator assembly to give a total of 9 gallons of agent. Agent tanks
must be ordered separately.
The tank enclosure is designed to mount in a minimum amount of
space.
SHIPPING WT.
26 LBS (12 kg)
FIGURE 11
002277
MOUNTING
BRACKET
HIPPING WT.
10 LB (5 kg)
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-4
REV.7 4-1-06
24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED
ONLY)
The 24 VDC Regulated Release Assembly, Part No. 429859, is
used where electric, thermostat detection is required via the use of
a releasing control unit. This assembly consists of a 24 VDC
ANSUL AUTOMAN Il-C regulated release mechanism, expellant
gas hose, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation
piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equip-
ment. Agent tank must be ordered separately.
The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic
actuation occurs when the control panel receives a signal from the
detection circuit. The panel then sends an electrical signal to the
24 VDC regulated release, causing it to actuate. When actuation
occurs, the gas cartridge is punctured, pressurizing the agent tank
and discharging the agent through the distribution piping. Manual
actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote
manual pull station pull ring.
ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLIES
Several complete shipping assemblies are available containing
both the release or actuator mechanism and the agent tank. When
ordering a complete shipping assembly, order the following part
numbers:
Shipping Wt.
Part No. Description lb (kg)
430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release 33 (15)
Shipping Assembly including:
429853 Mechanical Regulated
Release Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release 30 (14)
Shipping Assembly including:
429853 Mechanical Regulated
Release Assembly
429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly
430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 40 (18)
Shipping Assembly including:
429872 Two Tank Mounting Box
Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2)
430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping 20 (9)
Assembly including:
429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket
Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY 430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator 36 (16)
Shipping Assembly including:
SHIPPING W . 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly
34 LB (15 kg) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly'
430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 18 (8)
Shipping Assembly including:
429870 Single Tank Mounting Box
Assembly
429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly
418511 Hose Assembly
430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 20 (9)
FIGURE Shipping Assembly including:
002279 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box
Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
418511 Hose Assembly
0
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-5
7-1-09 REV. 8
S GAS CARTRIDGES NOZZLES
The R-1 02 system uses gas cartridges to store nitrogen or carbon
dioxide expellant gases under pressure until the system is actuat-
ed, at which time the cartridge seal is punctured and the released
gas expels liquid agent from one or more tanks through the dis-
charge piping and out the discharge nozzles.
Four nitrogen gas cartridges and three carbon dioxide gas car-
tridges are available as shown in Figure 13.
Cartridges noted as IC/DOT are both Transport Canada (TC) and
Department of Transportation (DOT) approved. Cartridges noted
as DOT are Department of Transportation approved only.
Cartridge selection options are provided in Section IV under Tank
and Cartridge Requirements.
NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES
There are 11 types of discharge nozzles each designed to distrib-
ute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the hazard
area:
1W Nozzle 7. 245 Nozzle
1 Nozzle 8. 260 Nozzle
1/2N Nozzle 9. 290 Nozzle
3N Nozzle 10. 2120 Nozzle
2W Nozzle 11. IF Nozzle
230 Nozzle
Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have
certain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for a
specific application and must only be used in those areas. See
Nozzle Application Chart in Section IV - System Design, for
individual nozzle usage.
3/8-18 NPT
FEMALE THREAD
S
U 'j
17 1/4
115/8
IN 12 1/4 (43.8 cm)
7 7/8 IN (29.5 C
(20 (31.1 cm)
21/21N. 21/2IN. 43/161N. 39/161N.
(6.4 cm) (6.4 cm) (10.6 cm) (9 cm)
LT-20-R LT-30-R DOUBLE-TANK LT-A-101-30
CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE
000145 000146 000147 000148
CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES
ff, 11 5
9 N. 77/8 IN. (29.5 cm)
-
(22.9 cm) (20 cm)
21N. 21/21N. 21/2IN.
(5.1 cm) (6.4 cm) (6.4 cm)
101-10 CARTRIDGE 101-20 CARTRIDGE 101-30 CARTRIDGE
000149 000150 000151
FIGURE 13
Additional cartridge shipping assemblies are available for
European and Australian requirements.
Cartridge European Australian IC/DOT
Description Part No. Part No. Part No.
LT-20-R 428440 428948 423429
LT-30-R 428441 426553 423435
Double Tank 428446 426563 423493
LT-A-101-30 428442 426555 423491
101-10-0O2 428443 N/A 423439
101-20-0O2 428445 N/A 423441
101-30 - CO2 428444 N/A 423443
Note: For 101-10 cartridge, Part No. 15850 is DOT only.
INTERNAL CUP
STRAINER
INSIDE
RECESS FOR
BLOW OFF
CAP LOOP VENDOR
CODE
NOZZLE (IF PRESENT)
STAMPING
FIGURE 14
000002
Nozzle Identification Chart
Note: See Component Index for nozzle package shipping assem-
bly part numbers.
Nozzle
Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle* Flow
Type Part No. Stamping No. Nozzle Material
1W Nozzle 419336 1W** 1 Chrome-Plated Body
1 N Nozzle 419335 1 N** 1 Chrome-Plated Body
1/2N Nozzle 419334 1/2N 1/2 Chrome-Plated Body 0.
3N Nozzle 419338, 3N 3 Chrome-Plated Body
2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2 Chrome-Plated Body
230 Nozzle 419339 230 2 Chrome-Plated Body
245 Nozzle 419340 245 2 Chrome-Plated Body
260 Nozzle 419341 260 2 Chrome-Plated Body
290 Nozzle 419342 290 2 Chrome-Plated Body
2120 Nozzle 419343 2120 2 Chrome-Plated Body
1 F Nozzle 419333 1 F 1 Chrome-Plated Body
* Nozzle stamping may contain an additional letter indicating a vendor's code.
**Stainless steel versions are available in the 1W nozzle (Part No. 432527) and
the iN nozzle (Part No. 435672).
SILICONE LUBRICANT
Dow Corning Compound 111, Part No. 78112, is available in a
5.3-ounce tube. Compound has excellent qualities for sealing and
lubricating system components.
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-6
REV. 7 7-1-09
SWIVEL ADAPTOR CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY
El
. The Swivel Adaptor Assembly consists of a swivel nut, swivel body
and swivel ball. All are chrome-plated. The swivel adaptor allows
any nozzle to be rotated approximately 300 in all directions. Swivel
Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor Shipping
Assembly, Part No. 423572, which contains 25 Swivel Adaptors or
Part No. 419385, which contains 9 Swivel Adaptors.
3/8-18 NPT
FEMALE THREAD
PT
READ
30
RO
FIGURE 15
000003
RUBBER BLOW-OFF CAPS
The Rubber Blow-Off Cap helps keep the orifice of the nozzle free
of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent dis-
tribution. A retaining strap attaches the blow-off cap to the nozzle.
Rubber Blow-Off Caps must be ordered as a Shipping Assembly,
Part No. 77695, which contains 50 blow-off caps, or Part No.
77411, which contains 12 blow-off caps.
FIGURE 16
000009
CB METAL BLOW-OFF CAP
The CB Metal Blow-off Cap Package, Part No. 433208, is used for
all high temperature environments. The metal blow-off cap con-
tains a special 0-ring placed inside the cap which integrates with
the nozzle to create a seal and to help hold the blow-off cap in
position.
The CB Metal Blow-Off Cap Package, Part No. 433208, contains
10 blow-off caps.
Also available is a 10 pack of CB Stainless Steel Blow-Off Caps,
Part No. 434707.
A 10 pack of Metal Blow-Off Cap 0-rings, Part No. 551530, is also
available.
The conduit offset assembly, Part No. 435961, is used to change
direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas valve, and
remote pull station lines. The conduit offset assembly can only be
used in the area where the conduit attaches to the regulated
release assembly. When using the conduit offset assembly, the
maximum number of pulley elbows is still allowed. The Conduit
Offset Shipping Assembly, Part No. 436063, consists of 6 conduit
offsets.
CONDUIT
COUPLING
CONDUIT
OFFSET
CONDUIT
CONNECT
FIGURE 18
000153
"QUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR
The "Quik-Seal" adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting that
produces a liquid-tight seal around both distribution piping and
detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and ducts.
The "Quik-Seal" adaptor accepts threaded pipe or conduit. The
adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78196), 3/8 in. (Part No.
77285), 1/2 in. (Part No. 77287), or 3/4 in. (Part No. 77289) pipe or
conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a conduit connector
must be installed in each end of the adaptor. The "Quik-Seal"
Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below:
Shipping
Assembly Hole Size
Size Part No. Qty. Required
1/4 in. 78196 24 3/4 in.
3/8 in. 77285 24 11/8 in.
1/2 in. 77287 24 11/8 in.
3/4 in. 77289 24 1 3/8 in.
ADAPTOR BODY
II GASKET
LOCKWASHER
NUT
FIGURE 19
500154
El
FIGURE 17
007633
GASKET
COMPRESSION NUT
ADAPTOR BODY
LOCK WASH ER
[IJIi
SEAL
ADAPTOR
BODY -
Lock Bar
SEAL NUT
PULLEY
ELBOW
(NOT PART
OF ASSEMBLY)
S
FIGURE 23
008325
USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW, PART NO. 423250 FIGURE 21
000156
REDUCING COUPLING
The reducing coupling, Part No. 436228, is made of stainless steel
material with 3/8 in. x 1/2 in. NPT inlet threads. If necessary, the
reducing coupling can be utilized when installing the Agent
Distribution Hose Line Kit, Part No. 435982. Two couplings are
required per Agent Distribution Hose.
I 1/4 IN.
(3.3 cm)
M-6r 1 3/16 IN.
(3.0 cm)
FIGURE 22
008324
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-7
7-1-09 REV. 6
S "COMPRESSION-SEAL" ADAPTOR
This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a
liquid-tight seal around pipe and conduit when installing distribu-
tion piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods and
ducts. The "Compression-Seal" adaptor is a straight-through
design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or pipe. The
adaptor is available for pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No. 79149), 3/8 in.
(Part No. 79151), 1/2 in. (Part No. 79147), and EMT conduit size of
1/2 in. (Part No. 79153). Each "Compression-Seal" Adaptor
Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below:
Shipping
Assembly Hole Size
Sze Part No. Oty. Required
1/4 in. Pipe / 1/2 in. tube 79149 24 3/4 in.
3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube 79151 24 11/Bin.
1/2 in. Pipe 79147 24 1 1/8 in.
1/2 in. EMT Conduit 79153 24 1 1/8 in.
FIGURE 20
000155
"HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY
S This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liq-
uid-tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT conduit when installing the detec-
tion line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adaptor accepts
a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used, correctly posi-
tions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in
the detector bracket. The "Hood Seal" eliminates the need for mul-
tiple elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the
detection line. "Hood Seal" Adaptors are available in quantities of
6 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 423253.
COCKING LEVER/LOCK BAR
The cocking lever is a component required to cock (arm) both the
mechanical/electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN release and the mech-
anical gas valve. After the ANSUL AUTOMAN is cocked (armed),
the lock bar must be inserted to eliminate the accidental firing of
the release mechanism. These components are available as either
an individual shipping assembly or a shipping assembly containing
both. Listed below are the various shipping assembly part num-
bers.
Part No. Description
435603 Short Handle Cocking Lever only
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
435790 Short Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Bar
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
14995 Long Handle Cocking Lever only
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
15618 Long Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Bar
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
26310 Cocking Lever only (ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C)
416018 Cocking Lever only (Mechanical Gas Valve)
14985 Lock Bar
Short Handle Cocking Lever
*Requires a crescent wrench or open end/box wrench
Long Handle Cocking Lever
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-8
REV. 8 7-1-09
DETECTORS PULLEY TEE S
The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket, link-
age, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must be
ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly to the
mounting surface. The linkage is used to support the fusible link.
The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature
and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the regulated release
mechanism.
The scissor style detector allows the wire rope to be strung com-
pletely through the detection system conduit and brackets first and
the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later.
The detector consists of two types of assemblies:
The Terminal Detector (Part No. 435546) includes a test link and
is placed last in a series of detectors. This detector is sometimes
referred to as the end-of-line detector and is thus named because
it is at the point at which the wire rope "terminates," or is anchored
at the detector bracket. Only one terminal detector is required per
detection system.
The Series Detector (Part No. 435547) is any detector located in-
line between the regulated release assembly and the terminal
detector.
When using Part No. 435546 and 435547 detectors, a total of 15
detectors can be in one detection system: 14 series detectors, Part
No. 435547 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 435546.
Note: Series Detector, Part No. 435547, is also available as Part
No. 435548, 25/Pkg.
The Pulley Tee (Part No. 427929) is used to change the direction
of two wire ropes by 900. It must be used in areas where the tem-
peratures are within the range of 32 OF to 130 OF (0 °C to 54 °C).
Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve actuation lines
and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley tees cannot be used
within a detection line.
FIGURE 26
000447
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal detector,
through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbows, and into
the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any fusible link
separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and the trip lever
actuates the regulated release mechanism. The cable can also be
used for mechanical gas valves and remote manual pull stations.
The cable is available in 50 ft (15 m) (Part No. 15821) and 500 It
(152.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths.
SCISSOR STYLE - PART NO. 435546 AND 435547
BRACKET
/
S
FIGURE 24
000159
PULLEY ELBOWS
There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direction
of the wire rope by 900. ANSUL recommends for temperatures not
in excess of 700 OF (371 °C). Part No. 415670 has socket ends
with set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No. 423250 has com-
pression ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit. Pulley elbows must be
ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 415671
(socket end type) and Part No. 423251 (compression end type).
PART NO. 415670 PART NO. 423250
000160 . 000161
FIGURE 25
0
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-9
7-1-09 REV. 5
S REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
S
The remote manual pull station (Part No. 434618 or 435960) is
made out of a molded red composite material. The red color
makes the pull station more readily identifiable as the manual
means for fire suppression system operation. The pull station is
compatible with the ANSUL Flexible Conduit. The molded manual
pull station should be mounted at a point of egress and positioned
at a height determined by the authority having jurisdiction. Trim
Rings, Part No. 427074 (pack of 10), are available.
Part No. 434618 (Without Wire Rope)
Part No. 435960 (With 50 ft (15.2 m) of Wire Rope)
FIGURE 27
008326
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
Flexible conduit allows for quicker installations and the conve-
nience of being able to route the cable over, under and around
obstacles. Flexible conduit can be used as a substitute for stan-
dard EMT conduit or can be used with EMT conduit. Flexible con-
duit can be used only with the Molded Manual Pull Station, Part
No. 434618, and mechanical gas valve installations. The Flexible
Conduit comes in a 500 ft (152.4 m) length, Part No. 434525, or
together with 500 ft (152.4 m) of wire rope, Part No. 435959.
Also available is a Flexible Conduit Strain Relief (50-pack), Part
No. 435979.
A 50-pack of Flexible Conduit Inserts, Part No. 434347, is also
available.
Note: Flexible conduit cannot be used in detection systems.
The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of gas
to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release assem-
bly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in., 1 1/2
in., and 2 in. ANSUL style; and 2 1/2 in. and 3 in. ASCO style. The
valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both styles are UL Listed
and includes the air cylinder, tubing, and fittings, Part No. 15733,
for connection to the release mechanism.
Maximum
Part Operating
No. Description Pressure
55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55601 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55604 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55610 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
25937 2 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (0.35 bar)
25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (0.35 bar)
Flow Capacity BTU/HR, at 1 in. P.D.
(CFH) 0.64 SP GR
Pipe Size RD. 1 in. WC 1000 BTUfft3
(inches) 0.64 SP GR Natural Gas
3/4 751 751,000
1 1288 1,288,000
11/4 1718 1,718,000
1 1/2 2630 2,630,000
2 4616 4,616,000
21/2 5700 5,800,000
3 7100 7,300,000
To calculate gas flow for other than 1 inch p.d.:
New cfh = (cfh at 1 inch) x J new p.d.
To calculate gas flow for other than 0.64 SP GR:
New cfh = (cfh at 0.64) x / 0.64
New SP GR
A B C
Valve Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
3/4 in. 33/4 (95.3) 63/8 (161.9) 51/2 (139.7)
1 in. 33/4 (95.3) 63/8 (161.9) 51/2 (139.7)
11/4 in. 47/8 (123.8) 73/8 (187.3) 63/8 (161.9)
11/2 in. 47/8 (123.8) 73/8 (187.3) 63/8 (161.9)
2 in. 57/8 (149.2) 77/8 (200.0) 611/16 (169.9)
2 1/2 in. 713/16 (198.4) 91/16 (230.2)
3 in. 725/32 (197.6) 91/16 (230.2)
3/4 IN. THRU 2 IN.
004208
21/2 IN. THRU 3 IN.
004209
FIGURE 28
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-10
REV.4 7-1-09
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of either
natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulat-
ed release assembly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in.,
1 in., 11/4 in., 1 1/2 in., 2 in., 2 1/2 in., and 3 in. The valve is held
open by an energized solenoid and upon system actuation, the
switch contacts in the regulated release assembly open, thus de-
energizing the circuit to the gas valve solenoid, causing the valve
to close. Valves are available in 120 VAC and are UL Listed.
Part Max. Operating
No. Description Pressure
13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
550360 1 1/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
13709 1 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
13710 2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
550363 21/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (0.35 bar)
17643 3 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (0.35 bar)
Flow Capacity - BTU/HR, at 1 in. P.D.
(CFH) 0.64 SP GR
Pipe Size RD. 1 in. WC 1000 BTU/ft3
(inches) 0.64 SP GR Natural Gas
3/4 264.96 247,500
1 1091.01 1,119,000
11/4 1662.49 1,730,000
1 1/2 1818.35 1,900,000
2 3117.18 3,251,000
21/2. 6078.49 5,821,000
3 7169.51 . 7,430,000
To calculate gas flow for other than 1 inch p.d.:
New cfh = (cfh at 1 inch) x J new p.d.
To calculate gas flow for other than 0.64 SP GR:
New cfh = (cfh atO.64)xjo.64
New SPGR
Valve A B
Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
3/4 in. 35/16 (81.0) 35/8 (92.1)
1 in. 5 (127.0) 627/32 (173.8)
11/4 in. 713/16 (198.4) 729/32 (200.8)
11/2 in. 5 (127.0) 519/32 (142.1)
2 in. 63/32 (78.6) 515/16 (150.8)
2 1/2 in. 713/16 (198.4) 729/32 (200.8)
3 in. 713/16 (198.4) 729/32 (200.8)
MANUAL RESET RELAY S
The Manual Reset Relay, Part No. 426151, is required when using
an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After the electric gas valve
has closed, either due to system actuation or power failure, the
valve cannot be re-opened, allowing gas to flow, until the reset
relay button is manually pressed, re-energizing the circuit. The
reset relay is available 120 VAC. The manual reset relay is also
recommended for electrical shut down.
FIGURE 30
000087
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas
valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric
power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are
designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated.
Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No. 423878,
Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No.
423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No. 423881. Mounting hardware
and 12 in. (305 mm) long wire leads are provided with each kit.
Each switch has a set of single-pole, double-throw contacts rated
at:
ULIcUL/CSA Rating ENEC Rating
250 VAC, 21A Resistive lE4T105p Approved
250 VAC, 2 HP 250V, 21A Resistive
125 VAC, 1 HP 8A Motor Load
COM NO.
FIGURE 31
001612
FIGURE 29
004210
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-11
7-1-09 REV. 1
ALARM INITIATING SWITCH ML STYLE Fusible Link To Be Used The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, can be field Fusible Shipping Where mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. This switch must Link Assembly Temperature Temperature be used to close a supervised alarm circuit to the building main fire Part No. Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This
action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actu- 550368(l) 551522 (10) 165 °F (74 °C) 100 -F (38 -C)
(1) 551523 (10) 212 °F (100 °C) 150 °F (66 °C) ation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary 550366 (1) 551524 (10) 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet.
The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. 550009(l) 551525 (10) 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C)
550367(l) 551526 (10) 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C)
SPACER 56816(1) 551527(10) 500°F(260°C) 400 °F(204°C)
TOWARD ANSUL WHEN SPACER AND 56816(l) 73867 (25) 500 °F (260 °C) 400 °F (204 °C)
MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER AUTOMAN L_1
SWITCH ARE PROPERLY
MUST BE BETWEEN THE
N.C. AND N.C. TERMINALS
10
0 &:~XD
COM
II I I
I TEMPERATURE
_
$ NO.
RATING STAMPED ON
L
______
FUSIBLE LINK BODY
NC _41'l.
K STYLE ML STYLE
000170 000171
FIGURE 34 ALARM INITIATING
SWITCH
FIGURE 32 MAXIMUM REGISTERING THERMOMETER
0000 The Maximum Registering Thermometer, Part No. 15240, may be
used to indicate the highest normal temperature for the protected
REGULATOR TEST KIT area. Once this is established, the correct rated fusible link can be
The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required to test chosen. Other methods for determining maximum temperatures
the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12-year maintenance may be used.
examinations. This will ensure that the regulator is functioning
properly. HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE
The Hose/Grommet Package, Part No. 418511, consists of a 24 in.
rubber hose and 2 (two) grommets. This package is required when
expellant gas hose is routed outside the ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release, Regulated Actuator, and/or tank enclosure
assemblies.
FIGURE 33
000169
FUSIBLE LINK
Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s)
according to the temperature condition chart below:
K STYLE Fusible Link To Be Used
Fusible Shipping Where
Link Assembly Temperature Temperature
Part No. Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed
415739(1) 415739(1) 165°F (74°C) 100°F (38°C)
415740(1) 415740(1) 212°F(100°C) 150°F (66°C)
415741 (1) 415744 (25) 280 °F (138 °C) 225°F (107 °C)
415742(1) 415745(25) 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C)
415743(l) 415746 (25) 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C)
0
417911
ADAPTOR
NOZZLE___
AIMING
DEVICE
Part No. Description
416970 In-Line Burst Disc Assembly
Burst Disc (Pack of 10)
FIGURE 35
008383
RED SIDE OF B!
DISC TO BETO.,-S
ADAPTOR, PART NO.
417707
1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE
The 1/4 in. check valve, Part No. 25627, blocks the flow of actua-
tion gas from the actuator that was actuated to the actuator(s) that
was not actuated. This prevents actuation gas from escaping from
an open actuator which may have had the cartridge removed.
CHECK VALVE PART NO. 25621
1/4 IN. NPT
(0.6 cm) 2 IN.
(5.1 cm)
FIGURE 36
000899
SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 3-12
REV. 1 7-1-09
IN-LINE BURST DISC ASSEMBLY (MANIFOLDED SYSTEMS
ONLY)
The in-line burst disc assembly is required to eliminate the siphon-
ing of the agent up the pipe during extreme temperature variations.
In addition to eliminating the siphoning effect, the common in-line
burst disc assembly eliminates the possibility of one or more indi-
vidual discs located in the tank adaptor from failing to burst. The
assembly consists of a stainless steel body which houses the
burst disc. When utilizing this assembly in a manifolded system, it
is necessary to modify (remove) the burst disc located in all of the
R-102 tank adaptors in the system. The in-line burst disc assem-
bly is to be mounted as close to the tank outlet as possible. After
system discharge, the assembly must be disassembled and a new
burst disc installed.
NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE
The Nozzle Aiming Device, Part No. 431992, is available to prop-
erly aim each nozzle to the correct aiming point. The device
clamps to the nozzle and emits a small laser light that reflects on
the surface that it is aiming at. The nozzle can then be rotated to
point at a predetermined aiming point and then tightened to hold
that angle. The aiming device adaptor attaches to the nozzle. The
shipping assembly consists of the aiming device and the adaptor.
FIGURE 37
006520
STAINLESS STEEL BRAIDED ACTUATION HOSE
The Stainless Steel Actuation Hose is used to connect the actua-
tion line compression tees between each pneumatic actuator. The
hose has the same thread, 7/16-20, as the fittings. The actuation
hose allows flexibility between the AUTOMAN and each regulated
actuator.
Hose Part No. Length Couplings
31809 16 in. (41 cm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females
32335 20 in. (51 cm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females
32336 24 in. (61 cm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females
430815 42 in. (107 cm) 7/16-20 Female x 1/4 in. NPT
Fitting
Part No. Description
31810 Male Elbow (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT)
31811 Male Tee (7/16-20 x 7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT)
415371 Tee (7/16-20 x 1/8 in. Male NPTx 1/8 in. Female NPT)
32338 Male Straight Connector (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT)
25627 1/4 in. Check Valve
W. 0A N,
Will
7/16-20 7/16-20
FIGURE 38
000433
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE AND RESTRAINING CABLE KIT
The Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining Cable Kit, Part No.
435982, consists of a 5 ft (1.5 m) long Agent Distribution Hose, a
3 ft (0.9 m) long Restraining Cable, and a Restraining Cable
Hardware Package. The Agent Distribution Hose can be utilized
with castered cooking appliances with castered supports found in
commercial kitchens. The hose allows for movement of the appli-
ance for cleaning without having to disconnect any fire suppres-
sion system discharge piping.
Note: The Agent Distribution Hose is authorized for use with only
UL Listed ANSUL Wet Chemical Restaurant Fire Suppression
Systems.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-1
7-1-09 REV. 8
S SYSTEM DESIGN GENERAL INFORMATION
S
The ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System may be
used on a number of different types of restaurant cooking appli-
ances and hood and duct configurations. The design information
listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of
this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the
design of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current
ANSUL certificate in an R-102 training program.
The R-102 and the PIRANHA systems use compatible agents and
components, therefore, they may be used together for cooking
appliance, hood, and duct protection. The primary ANSUL
AUTOMAN Release can be either an R-102 or a PIRANHA
ANSUL AUTOMAN Release and can actuate up to two additional
R-102 or PIRANHA Regulated Actuators. In systems utilizing a
101 remote release, any combination of the maximum number of
regulated actuators can be used.
Both systems must actuate simultaneously.
Each system must be designed and installed per its appropri-
ate manual.
Adjacent appliances requiring protection must be protected
with the same type of system, either R-102 or PIRANHA,
unless the center-to-center spacing between the adjacent
R-102 and PIRANHA nozzles is no less than 36 in. (91.4 cm).
When appliances are protected with R-102 nozzles, the hood
and connecting duct above those appliances cannot be pro-
tected with PIRANHA nozzles.
Mixing systems in a common plenum is not allowed.
One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a correct
system design. This section is divided into ten sub-sections: Noz-
zle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements, Actu-
ation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution Piping
Requirements, Detection System Requirements, Manual Pull Sta-
tion Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve Requirements, Electri-
cal Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical Switch Requirements, and
Pressure Switch Requirements. Each of these sections must be
completed before attempting any installation. System design
sketches should be made of all aspects of design for reference
during installation.
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and
quantity for duct, plenum, and individual appliance protection. This
section must be completed before determining tank quantity and
piping requirements.
Duct Protection - Single Nozzle
All duct protection is UL listed without limitation of maximum duct
length (unlimited length). This includes all varieties of ductworks
both horizontal and vertical including ducts that run at angles to
the horizontal and ducts with directional bends.
The R-102 system uses different duct nozzles depending on the
size of duct being protected.
1. Nozzles must be located 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the
duct opening, discharging up. See Figure 1.
2-8 IN.
(5 - 20 cm)
FIGURE 1
00D173
In installations where a UL listed damper assembly is
employed, the duct nozzle can be installed beyond the 8 in.
(20 cm) maximum, to a point just beyond the damper assem-
bly that will not interfere with the damper. Exceeding the maxi-
mum of 8 in. (20 cm) in this way will not void the UL listing of
the system.
Previously listed 3 flow number and 5 flow number duct pro-
tection detailed in earlier published manual, Part No. 418087-
06, can also still by utilized.
DUCT SIZES UP TO 50 IN. (127 cm)
PERIMETER/ 16 IN. (41 cm) DIAMETER
One 1W nozzle (Part No. 419336) = one flow number
50 in. (127 cm) perimeter maximum
16 in. (41 cm) diameter maximum
DUCT SIZES UP TO 100 IN. (254 cm)
PERIMETER/ 32 IN. (81.3 cm) DIAMETER
One 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = two flow numbers
100 in. (254 cm) perimeter maximum
32 in. (81.3 cm) diameter maximum
The chart below shows the maximum protection available from
each duct nozzle.
Part 3.0 Gallon 1.5 Gallon
Description No. System System
(2W Nozzle 419337 Maximum Maximum
100 in. (254 cm) 100 in. (254 cm)
Perimeter Perimeter
/ 1W Nozzle 419336 Maximum Maximum
50 in. (127 cm) 50 in. (127 cm)
Perimeter Perimeter
[1
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-2
REV. 4 4-1-06
Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle
DUCT SIZES UP TO 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER -3
FLOW OPTION
One 1W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) and one 2W Nozzle
(Part No. 419337) = three flow numbers
135 in. (343 cm) perimeter maximum
No round duct option available
Follow design table in Figure 2 to determine maximum module
size for each nozzle
p 1W Module 2W Module
Side A Side B Side B Side B
Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
4 (10) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94)
5 (13) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94)
6 (15) 59.5 (151) 22.5 (57) 37.0 (94)
7 (18) 59.0 (150) 22.0 (56) 37.0 (94)
8 (20) 58.5 (149) 22.0 (56) 36.5 (93)
9 (23) 58.0 (147) 21.5 (55) 36.5 (93)
10 (25) 57.0 (145) 21.0 (53) 36.0 (91)
11 (28) 56.0 (142) 20.5 (52) 35.5 (90)
12 (31) 55.5 (141) 20.0 (51) 35.5 (90)
13 (33) 54.5 (138) 19.5 (50) 35.0 (89)
14 (36) 53.5 (136) 18.5 (47) 35.0 (89)
15 (38) 52.0 (132) 18.0 (46) 34.0 (86)
16 (41) 51.0 (130) 17.0 (43) 34.0 (86)
17 (43) 49.5 (126) 16.0 (41) 33.5 (85)
18 (46) 47.5 (121) 14.5 (37) 33.0 (84)
19 (48) 46.0 (117) 13.5 (34) 32.5 (83)
20 (51) 43.5 (111) 12.0 (31) 31.7 (81)
21 (53) 41.0 (104) 10.0 (25) 31.0 (79)
22 (56) 38.0 (97) 7.5 (19) 30.5 (78)
23 (58) 33.5 (85) 4.0 (10) 29.5 (75)
4 ISideB I
__ . ISideAl Liwi I2WI
FIGURE 2
-006521
Example; Protection is required for a duct that has an "A" dimen-
sion of 8.0 in. (20 cm) wide and a "B" dimension of 55 in. (140 cm)
long.
Referring to the table in Figure 2, if the "A" dimension is 8.0 in. (20
cm), the "B" dimension must not exceed 58.5 in. (149 cm). In this
example, the "B" dimension is 55 in. (140 cm), therefore, this duct
can be protected with a three flow application.
Read over from the 8.0 in. (20 cm) line on the table to the 1W
Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the "B" module
length for the 1W nozzle can be 22.0 in. (56 cm). Center the 1W
nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now be centered with-
in the remaining module.
S
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-3
7-1-09 REV. 5
Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle (Continued)
DUCT SIZES GREATER THAN 100 IN. (254 cm) PERIMETER
Ducts over 100 in. (254 cm) perimeter may be modularized using
2W nozzles (Part No. 419337)
No round duct option available
Follow the design chart to determine maximum module size for
each 2W nozzle
When determining number of nozzles required, it is sometimes
an advantage to check the chart using the shortest side as Side
"A" and then recheck it using the longest side as Side "A". This
comparison may reveal a need for a lesser quantity of nozzles
one way versus the other way.
When working with Chart 1, the quantity of nozzles determined
must be equally divided within the duct area.
CHART NO.1
B
AS S • in.
SIDE "B" cm
When working with Chart 2, one half of the quantity of nozzles
determined must be equally positioned in the top half of the area
of the duct and the remaining half of the nozzles must be posi-
tioned in the bottom half of the duct area.
Example: The duct to be protected has a Side "A" of 40 in.
(101.6 cm) and a Side "B" of 60 in. (152.4 cm). Referring to the
design chart, this duct requires 4 nozzles. One half of 4 = 2.
Therefore, 2 nozzles must be equally positioned in each of the two
duct areas. See Figure 3.
SIDE "B"
30 IN. (76 cm) 30 IN. (76 cm)
201N. t (51 cm) I
SIDE I 40 IN.
"A" - -------- -- (102 cm)
20 IN.
(51 cm)
I
60 IN. I (152 cm)
FIGURE 3
S
P.
I
uuua•u•••u•u•m•u•ui•uui
CHART NO.2
B
I. . Al— ----- 1 • NOTE: NOZZLE QUANTITIES LISTED IN CHART 2 MUST BE EQUALLY DIVIDED INTO EACH OF THE TWO DUCT MODULES.
SIDE
"A"
In.
SIDE
'A'
CM
006522
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-4
REV. 7 7-1-09
S Transition Protection
Transitions are protected at a point in the transition where the
perimeter or the diameter is equal to or less than the maximum
size duct that can be protected. The nozzle(s) must be located in
the center of the area at that point, or center of the module pro-
tected when more than one duct nozzle is required. Note: Nozzles
to protect ducts with a transition that is more than 4 ft (1.2 m)
in height, will be required to be positioned in the opening of
the transition from the hood 2 to 8 in. (5.1 to 20.3 cm) into the
opening using standard duct nozzle design parameters. See
Figure 4.
The 1/2N nozzle (Part No 419334) must be centered 10 to 26 in.
(25 to 66 cm) below the precipitator and aimed to discharge at the
center of each precipitator cell. However, if it is physically impossi-
ble to mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) due to pre-
cipitator placement, the nozzle may be mounted closer than 10 in.
(25 cm). See Figure 5.
DUCT II I II SEE DUCT FOR
I I
II TRANSITION NOZZLE I II PROTECTION
PRECIPITATOR
-f t 10-26 IN.*
(25.66 cm)
NOZZLE FOR
PRECIPITATOR
PROTECTION
IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (25 TO 66 cm), NOZZLE MAY BE
FIGURE 4 MOUNTED CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (25 cm).
000174
. FIGURE 5
000196 Electrostatic Precipitator Protection
Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precipita-
tor installed at or near the base. These precipitators are generally
small and are used to aid in the cleaning of exhaust air.
Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be pro-
tected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1/2N noz-
zle(s) (Part No. 419334) for the precipitator. One 1/2N nozzle must
be used for each cell being protected. This nozzle tip is stamped
with 1/2N, indicating that it is a 1/2-flow nozzle and must be count-
ed as 1/2 flow number.
When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct noz-
zle(s) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to dis-
charge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a duct, the
nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct protection guide-
lines. If the area above the precipitator is a transition, the transition
guidelines must be followed.
Note: For protection of Pollution Control Units (PCUs) or air scrub-
bers with or without ESPs, contact Ansul Technical Services for
non-UL listed recommended application.
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-5
7-1-09 REV. 5
S Plenum Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) or the
1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for plenum protection. The 1W noz-
zle tip is stamped with 1W and the 1 N nozzle tip is stamped with
1 N, indicating they are one-flow nozzles and must be counted as
one flow number each. When protecting a plenum chamber, the
entire chamber must be protected regardless of filter length.
VERTICAL PROTECTION - GENERAL
1W NOZZLE - PART NO. 419336 - SINGLE AND "V" BANK
PROTECTION
One 1W nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of plenum. The
maximum distance from the end of the hood to the first and last
nozzle must be no more than 2 ft (0.6 m). After the first nozzle, any
additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum of 4 ft (1.2 m)
apart down the entire length of the plenum. The plenum width must
not exceed 4 It (1.2 m). (The 1W nozzle can be used on single or
V-bank filter arrangements.) See Figure 6.
2 FT (0.6 m)
MAXIMUM 4 FT (1.2 m)
MAXIMUM ,,
4 FT (1.2 m)4 FT (1.2 m)
2 FT (06 m) MAXIM MAXIMUM UM
MAXIMUM J-1... I
51 cm)
IUM
FIGURE 7
000199
Option 2: The 1W nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 8-12 in.
(20-30 cm) from the face of the filter and angled to the
center of the filter. The nozzle tip must be within 2 in.
(5 cm) from the perpendicular center line of the filter.
See Figure 8.
12 IN. (30 cm)
MAXIMUM
S
4 IN.
(10 c
8 IN. (20 cm)
MINIMUM
FIGURE 6
000197
NOZZLE TIP —
MUST BE WITHIN
THIS AREA
When protecting plenums with the 1W nozzle, two options of cov-
erage are available:
Option 1: The 1W nozzle must be on the center line of the single
or "V' bank filter and positioned within 1-20 in.
(2.5-51 cm) above the top edge of the filter. See
Figure 7.
FIGURE 8
000200
HORIZONTAL PROTECTION - OPTION 1
IN NOZZLE - PART NO. 419335— SINGLE BANK PROTECTION
One 1 N nozzle will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) of single filter bank
plenum. The nozzle(s) must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in.
(5 to 10 cm) from,the face of the filter, centered between the filter
height dimension, and aimed down the length. The nozzle must be
positioned 0-6 in. (0-15 cm) from the end of the hood to the tip of the
nozzle. See Figure 9.
Al
000201
FIGURE 9
FIGURE 13
000207
S FIGURE 14
000206
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-6
REV.7 7-1-09
S Plenum Protection (Continued)
HORIZONTAL PROTECTION - OPTION 2
1W NOZZLE - PART NO. 419336— "V' BANK PROTECTION
One 1W nozzle will protect 6 linear feet (1.8 m) of "V' bank plenum.
The nozzle must be mounted horizontally, positioned 1/3 the filter
height down from the top of the filter. Nozzles can be located at 6 ft
(1.8 m) spacings on longer plenums. The nozzle must be positioned
0-6 in. (0-15 cm) from the end of the hood to the tip of the nozzle.
See Figure 10.
1W NOZZLE
For a plenum, either single or "V" bank, with a linear extension
longer than 10 ft (3.1 m), each bank may be protected using one
1 nozzle every 10 ft (3.1 m) or less depending on the overall
length of the plenum. See Figure 12. The nozzles may point in the
opposite directions as long as the entire plenum area is protected,
and the 10 ft (3.1 m) limitation is not exceeded. See Figure 13. The
nozzle positioning shown in Figure 14 is not an acceptable method
of protection because the plenum area directly under the tee is not
within the discharge pattern of either nozzle.
tO FT (3.1 m)
MAXIMUM
10 FT (3.1 m)
MAXIMUM
10 FT (3.1 m)
MAXIMUM
FT (9.1 m)
FIGURE 12
000206
10 FT (3.1 m) • MAXIMUM
FIGURE 10
006524
TWO (2) 1 N NOZZLES - PART NO. 419335 - "V' BANK PRO-
TECTION
Two 1 nozzles will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) by 4 ft (1.2 m)
wide of V' bank plenum. The nozzles must be mounted in the
plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered
between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length.
The nozzle must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-15 cm) from the end of the
hood to the tip of the nozzle. See Figure 11.
10 FT (3.1 m)
MAXIMUM
10 FT (3.1 m)
MAXIMUM
30 FT (9.1 m)
2
(
FIGURE 11
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-7
10-1-02 REV. 3
0 Appliance Protection
The following pages detail types of appliance protection. Each
design requires several factors: correct nozzle choice, correct noz-
zle height above hazard, correct nozzle location and correct aim-
ing point.
Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection
1. Design requirements for fryers are broken down into two
types.
FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARDS
If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the
internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back)
and length of the frypot.
FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARDS
If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both
the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to
back) and length of the frypot portion, and then measure
the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area
including any dripboard areas.
2. Using Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Single
Nozzle Fryer Protection," determine which nozzle is needed
to protect the fryer based on the maximum dimensions listed.
If the fryer does not include a dripboard, use the maxi-
mum dimensions listed in the first column of the table to
select the correct nozzle.
If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, use both the
maximum frypot dimensions in the first column of the
table, and the maximum overall dimensions in the second
column of the table to select the correct nozzle. None of
the maximum dimensions in either column may be
exceeded.
3. if either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceed-
ed, an additional nozzle(s) will be required. Refer to the mul-
tiple nozzle requirements.
Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside of the frypot without
the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 18 in. in length (46 cm x
46 cm) and the inside of the overall area including the dripboard
measures 18 in. in depth x 24 in. in length (46 cm x 61 cm). From
the Table 'Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Single Nozzle
Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select-
ed to protect the fryer, depending on the maximum nozzle height
above the fryer and the positioning requirements allowed. Refer to
appropriate Figures.
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-8
REV. 6 4-1-06
Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection (Continued)
Maximum Area Dimensions - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection
Max. Size
Max. Size Overall Type of
Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 230
14 in. x15 in. l4 in. x21 in.
(36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 53 cm)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 245
14 in. x15 in. l4 in. x21 in.
(36cmx38cm) (36cmx53cm)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 290
l4 in. xl5in. l4 in. x2lin.
(36cmx38cm) (36cmx53cm)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 290
14 1/2 in. x 14 in. 14 1/2 in. x26 1/2 in.
.(37cmx38cm) (37cmx67cm)
---- i
I -
I Ti I I I I I
I Ii
I I
TOP OF FRYER
Nozzle Height
Above Top of Fryer
27 in. to 47 in.
(69 cm to 119 cm)
20 in. to 27 in.
(51 cm to 69 cm)
13 in. to 16 in.
(33 cm to 41 cm)
16 in. to 27 in.
(41 cm to 69 cm)
Nozzle
Location
See Figure
15 and 16
See Figure
15 and 16
See Figure 17
See Figure 17
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SPLIT VAT
SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING
FIGURE 15 SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA.
Fl 002200 GURE 16
002283
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-9
4-1-06 REV. 8
Fryer - Single Nozzle Protection (Continued)
Maximum Area Dimensions - Single Nozzle Fryer Protection (Continued)
Max. Size
Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle
Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location
19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 253/8 in. 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 17 (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x 65 cm) (33 to 41 cm)
19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 3N See Figure See Figure 18
(50cmx48cm) (50cmx65cm) 18
18 in. x 18 in. 18 in. x 273/4 in. 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 19
P. (46 cm x 46 cm) (46 cm x 70.5 cm) (64 cm to 89 cm)
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA ± 3 IN.
(7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND ± 1
IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND
AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE COOKING AREA.
FIGURE 17
002296
34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL
DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND
CENTER OF HAZARD AREA
VERTICAL
NOZZLE
jJ
HEIGHT
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF
COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA.
FIGURE 18
002287
000010 RIGHT-TO-LEFT
CENTERLINE
000008
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
NOTE: 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE SURFACE
AREA WITHIN THE FRONT HALF OF THE FRY POT AND AIMED AT THE CENTER.
FIGURE 19
0
002296 •
EXAMPLE ONLY
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD 000215 EXAMPLE ONLY
FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
AREA OF EACH FRY
POT MODULE
CANNOT EXCEED +J 324 IN.'
(2090 cm2)
AREA OF THIS
I MODULE (FRY
I POT PLUS DRIP b BOARD) CANNOT
EXCEED
4971N .2
(3206 cm2)
±
DRIP BOARD
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-10
REV. 7 7-1-09
Fryer - Multiple Nozzle Protection
Design Requirements:
Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single nozzle can be divided
into modules. Each module must not exceed the maximum area
allowed for a single nozzle. However, when utilizing multiple nozzle
protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer with dripboard can
be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a dripboard or not.
The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 in.2
(5574 cm2) or in terms of It, 6 ft2 (0.6 m2).
1. Design requirements for multiple nozzle fryers are broken
down into two types:
FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARD(S)
If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the inter-
nal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and
length of the frypot. Then, multiply the depth and length to
obtain the area of the frypot in square inches.
FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARD(S)
If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the
internal depth and length of the frypot portion, and then
measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard
area including any dripboard areas.
Determine the area of both the frypot and the area of the
overall vat by multiplying corresponding depth and length
dimensions.
2. Divide the frypot or overall vat into modules, each of which can
be protected by a single nozzle, based on the maximum
dimension and area coverage of the nozzle as specified in
Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Multiple Nozzle
Protection."
If the module considered does not include any portion of
the dripboard, use only the maximum frypot area and max-
imum dimension listed in the first column of the table to
select the correct nozzle.
If the module considered includes any dripboard areas, use
both the maximum frypot area and dimension listed in the
first column of the table, and the maximum overall area and
dimensions listed in the second column of the table to
select the correct nozzle.
3. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be
exceeded. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are
exceeded, the area divided into modules will need to be rede-
fined with the possibility of an additional nozzle.
Options For Modularizing Fryers
The following Figure 20 shows approved methods of dividing (mod-
ularizing) fryers so that each section can be properly protected.
Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside vat without the drip-
board measures 18 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (46 cm. x 76 cm)
and the inside of the overall vat including the dripboard measures
24 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (61 cm 76 cm). Because the fryer
is 30 in. (76 cm) in length, it exceeds the coverage of a single
nozzle.
Dividing the length in half, each module now has an overall vat
dimension of 24 in. in depth x 15 in. in length (61 x 38 cm). From
the Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension - Multiple Nozzle
Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select-
ed to protect each fryer module, depending on the maximum noz-
zle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements
allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures, 15 through 19.
See additional examples in Appendix Section.
AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE
CANNOT EXCEED 324 IN.2 (2090 cm2)
EACH MODULAR AREA, INCLUDING DRIPBOARD,
MUST NOT EXCEED 497 IN.' (3207 cm2)
MIDPOINT
+
MIDPOINT
DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD
000214
EXAMPLE ONLY
FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
FIGURE 20
Nozzle Height
Above Top of Fryer
27 in. to 47 in.
(69 cm to 119 cm)
20 in. t027in.
(51 to 69 cm)
13 in. to 16 in.
(33 to 41 cm)
13 in. to 16 in.
(33 to 41 cm)
16 in. to 27 in.
(41 to 69 cm)
See Figure 23
25 in. to 35 in.
(64 cm to 89 cm)
Nozzle
Location
See Figure 21
See Figure 21
See Figure 22
See Figure 22
See Figure 22
See Figure 23
See Figure 24
34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL
DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE
AND CENTER I
HAZARD AREA
I 2l in. (53(
MINIMUM
%J<VERTICAL
NOZZLE
HEIGHT
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE
PERIMETER OF THE MODULAR IT IS PROTECTING AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF
THAT RESPECTIVE MODULE AREA.
FIGURE 23
-1'--.__ AIM POINT
I I'IT' (DIAGONAL
CENTER OF
MODULE
COOKING
AREA)
RIGHT-TO-
LEFT
CENTER-
LINE
002293
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
THE 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE
PERIMETER AND FORWARD OF THE RIGHT-TO-LEFT CENTERLINE OF THE COOKING
AREA. THE AIMING POINT OF THE NOZZLE MUST BE AT THE DIAGONAL CENTER OF
THE MODULAR COOKING AREA.
FIGURE 24
AIM POINT (DIAGONAL I I CENTER OF MODULE
I I COOKING AREA)
0-LEFT
1LINE -
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-11
4-1-06 REV. 8
Fryer - Multiple Nozzle Protection (Continued)
Maximum Area Dimension - Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection
Max. Size Module
Max. Size Module Overall Type of
Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat
21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 230
(53 cm 0.14 m2) (53 cm 0.19 m2)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat
21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 245
(53 cm 0.14 m2) (53 cm 0.19 m2)
' Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat
21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 290
(53 cm 0.14 m2) (53 cm 0.19 m2)
25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 290
(65 cm x 0.24 m2) (65 cm x 0.32 m2)
' Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat
26 1/2 in. x 203 in.2 26 1/2 in. x 384 1/4 in.2 290
(67 cm x 0.13 m2) (67 cm x 0.25 m2)
25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 3N
(65 cm x 0.24 m2) (65 cm x 0.32 m2)
27 3/4 x 324 in.2 27 3/4 x 497 in2 3N
(70.5 cm x 0.21 m2) (70.5 cm x 0.32 m2)
O213
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
POSITION NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE
MODULE IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR AREA.
FIGURE 21
---.-- --r- --
r n2A21
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR
AREA ± 3 IN. (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE
MODULE AND ± 1 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF
THE MODULE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE MODULE.
FIGURE 22
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-12
REV. 6 7-1-09
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection —Tilt Skillet / Braising Pan
Protection for tilt skillets or braising pans is to be based upon the
coverage limitations provided for deep fat fryer protection. Refer to
Section IV, DESIGN, starting on Page 4-10, for maximum fryer
nozzle coverages and maximum fryer nozzle height limitations.
P. Although the maximum 6 ft2 (0.6 m2) total surface cooking area
requirement applies to fryer protection, it does not apply to tilt skil-
lets or braising pans.
Each tilt skillet/braising pan protected module must not exceed the
fryer limitations for "MAXIMUM SIZE MODULE OVERALL WITH
DRIPBOARD" coverage per nozzle as described in Table on Page
4-11.
Tilt skillets and braising pans generally utilize a hinged cover. Fryer
protection nozzles are to be placed toward the front of the appli-
ance to minimize the potential for the tilt skillet or braising pan
cover to interfere with the nozzle discharge. See Figures 25 and
26.
COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH
NOZZLE DISCHARGE
10
000011
THE NOZZLE IS TO BE PLACED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE APPLIANCE TO MINIMIZE
THE POTENTIAL FOR THE SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN COVER TO INTERFERE WITH THE
NOZZLE DISCHARGE. FIGURE 25
COVER MUST NOT
INTERFERE WITH EDGE J'J'
GE PATTERN
I
OF DIS
,,,,,,
/
,
FOR MINIMUM
AND MAXIMUM
NOZZLE
HEIGHTS, REFER
TO FRYER / NOZZLE
PARAMETERS
I' 1 000071 i
FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE
POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK
CENTERLINE OF THE PAN. THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY
CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN.
FIGURE 26
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-13
7-1-09 REV. 8
Range Protection
The R-102 system uses five different nozzles for the protection of
ranges. Two of the design options require a one-flow nozzle and
three of the design options require two-flow nozzles.
NOTICE
A 13 in. (33 cm) diameter wok pan is the largest
wok size that can be protected on ranges.
When protecting hot top ranges, the entire
cooking surface must be protected.
Range Protection iN (1-Flow) Nozzle - High Proximity
Application
No Obstructions
Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a 1N
nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indi-
cating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one
flow number.
When using this nozzle for range protection, the maximum length
of the burner grates being protected with a single nozzle must not
exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates
must not exceed 384 in.2 (2477 cm2) per nozzle.
When protecting a range, the 1 N nozzle must be located a maxi-
mum of 10 in. (25.4 cm) from each burner grate centerline and
must be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figures
27 and 28.
40 N. \
(102 cm) T
30 IN. I (76 cm) \ / I i
006539
r.
FIGURE 27
10 IN.
(25 cm)
MAXIMUM
32 IN.
(81 cm)
MAXIMUM
NOZZLE
AIMING
POINT
S 10 IN.
(25 cn
MAXII
006540
FIGURE 28
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-14
REV. 6 7-1-09
Range Protection 245 (2-Flow) Nozzle - High Proximity
Application
No Obstructions
..40 in. to 50 in. (102 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle, Part No.
419340.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 245 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 672 in.2
(4335 cm2) with a maximum longest dimension of 28 in. (71 cm).
When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must
be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures
29 and 30.
245 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER 0
COOKING SURFACE
OR
11 3/8 IN. (29 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZ
TO CENTER OF ANY
BURNER GRATE
ING
C
245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE
1• I 501
I (127 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 245
I . NOZZLE
I TIP
40 IN.
(102 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 245
NOZZLE
TIP
I .'
000236 Z41i.z.
245 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER OF I COOKING SURFACE
OR
11 318 IN. (29 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
TO CENTER OF ANY
BURNER GRATE
COOKING
AREA
__T
-+ COOKING
AREA
000766
FIGURE 30 •
FIGURE 29
NOTICE
Four burner grates shown in Figure 30. For sin-
gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at
center of cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm)
maximum from nozzle centerline to center of
any burner grate.
C
260 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER
OF COOKING
SURFACE
OR
10 IN. (25.4 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF
NOZZLE TO
CENTER OF ANY
BURNER GRATE
260 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTE
OF COOKING
SURFACE
OR
10 IN. (25.4 cm)
MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF
NOZZLE TO
CENTER OF ANY
BURNER GRATE
:ING
KING
FIGURE 32
000766
NOTICE
Four burner grates shown in Figure 32. For sin-
gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at
Center of cooking surface.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-15
7-1-09 REV. 5
S Range Protection 260 (2-Flow) Nozzle - Medium Proximity
Application
No Obstructions
30 in. to 40 in. (76 cm to 102 cm) above the cooking surface.
The medium proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No.
419341.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 768 in.2
(4955 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 32 in. (81 cm).
When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must
be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures
31 and 32.
260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE
401
(102 cm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 260
NOZZLE
TIP
30 IN.
(76 cm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 260
NOZZLE
TIP
000236
0000 4_4
FIGURE 31
[I
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-16
REV. 7 7-1-09
Range Protection 1 (1-Flow) Nozzle - Low Proximity
Application
15 in. to 20 in. (38.1 cm to 50.8 cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity 1-flow nozzle application for the protection of
ranges requires the 1 nozzle, Part No. 419335.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that it is a one-flow
nozzle and must be counted as one (1) flow number,
When using the 1 N nozzle for low proximity range protection with
or without obstruction, the maximum length of the burner grates
being protected must not be exceed 24 in. (61.0 cm) length, aimed
along a centerline to a point 20 in. (50.8 cm) from the end of the
length, protecting a maximum width of 18 in. (45.7 cm).
When protecting a range, the 1 N nozzle must be located a maxi-
mum of 9 in. (22.9 cm) from each burner grate centerline and must
be positioned above the edge of the hazard area to be protected.
The 1 N nozzle tip must be positioned at or below the obstruction,
if present. The protected area begins at the point straight down
from the nozzle tip. The nozzle can be placed at the side of the
range aimed either left or right, or can be placed in the front or
back of the range. See Figures 33 and 34 for nozzle location
details.
\
I\
15-2OIN. AIM
(38-51 cm) I POINT
I b20 IN. /i'
0000
007924
FIGURE 33
PROTECTED AREA
At (237
18 IN.
Range Protection Two (2) 290 (2-Flow) Nozzles - Low
Proximity Application
15 in. to 20 in. (38 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity 2-flow application requires the use of two (2) 290
nozzles, Part No. 419342.
Both nozzle tips are stamped with 290 indicating they are two flow
nozzles and must be counted together for a total of four (4) flow
numbers.
Two (2) 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 in.2
o. (6503 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (91 cm).
When using two of these nozzles for low proximity range protec-
tion, the nozzles must be positioned along the cooking surface
perimeter to 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed at a
450 angle along the longitudinal centerline of the range. See
s. Figures 35 and 36.
290 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION 0-1.5 IN.
(0— 3.8 cm)
IN FROM EDGE OF
r
45 45 COOKING SURFACE
15 IN. TO2O IN. I i 15 INTO 20 IN.
(38 to 51 cm) (38 to 51 cm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
[_0000 00l
FIGURE 35
002276
COOKING - LONGITUDINAL I AREA "I CENTERLINE
COOKING
AREA
I 290 NOZZLE TIP
-.. F- - k- LOCATION CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
±2 IN. (5 cm)
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
0— 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE 000239
OF COOKING SURFACE
20 IN.
(5lcm)
el t__ 24 IN.
(61 cm)
COOKING
AREA
000240
FIGURE 34
AREA
I 290 NOZZLE TIP
- l- LOCATION CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
±2 IN. (5 cm) 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
0— 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE
OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 36
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-17
7-1-09 REV. 6
Range Protection (With or Without Back Shelf/Obstruction)
i. When this type of hazard is equipped with a back shelf or other
P. similarly sized obstruction located above the range top, two pro-
tection options are available: One requires a 1 F nozzle, Part No.
419333, and the other option requires a 260 nozzle, Part No.
419341.
Range Protection 1F(1-Flow) Nozzle (With or Without Back
Shelf/Obstruction)
Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a 1 F
nozzle, Part No. 419333. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 F indi-
cating that it is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow
number.
When using the 1 F nozzle for range protection with or without back
shelf or other similarly sized obstruction, the maximum length of
the burner grates being protected must not exceed 28 in. (71 cm)
and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed
e. 336 in.2 (2168 cm2). See Figure 37 for nozzle location details.
iF NOZZLE
SHELF OR OTHER SIMILARLY SIZED
OBSTRUCTION CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S)
BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm)
20 IN. AIM (51 cm)
(102-122cm) 'MINIMUM 40-48 IN. POINT
14 IN.
12 IN. 14 IN. MAXIMUM
(35.6 cm) (30.5 cm) FRONT 7 D REAR MAXIMUM MAXIMUM CENTERLINE
1 NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED
SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR
CENTERLINE AND SHALL BE AIMED AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 37
000238
Range Protection 260 (2-Flow) Nozzle (With or Without Back
Shelf/Obstruction)
Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a 260
nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indi-
cating that it is a two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow
numbers.
I When using the 260 nozzle for range protection with or without
back shelf or other similarly sized obstruction, the maximum length
of burner grates being protected must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm)
and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed
384 in.2 (2477 cm2). Nozzle must be located on the front edge of
the burner grates and aimed at a point 10 in. (25 cm) from the back
edge of the burner grates. Nozzle must be mounted 30 to 40 in.
(76 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. See Figure 38.
260 NOZZLE
SHELF OR OTHER SIMILARLY SIZED
OBSTRUCTION CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S)
BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm)
18 IN.
(45.7 cm)
30-40 IN. MINIMUM
(76-102 cm)
10 IN.
(25 cm) FROM
BACK OF
BURNER
GRATES
FIGURE 38
000238o
NOZZLE LOCATION
II 0-2 IN. (0-5cm)
I I INSIDE PERIMETER 40 IN.
OF COOKING SURFACE I I (102 cm) II 'II MAXIMUM
I HEIGHT
OF 1N I . /,-J NOZZLE TIP
I / I 35 IN. (69 cm)
/ I MINIMUM I
I HEIGHT I
EDGE
OF
COOKING I J/ OF 1N I u
. NOZZLETIP
SURFACE L
COOKING
AREA
1 IN. (2 cm)
MAXIMUM
CENTER OF GRIDDLE SURFACE OR A
MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 20.6 IN.
(52 cm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE TO
FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-18
REV. 7 7-1-09
S ,-Griddle Protection iN (1-Flow) Nozzle -High Proximity
Application
The R-102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection of
griddles. One of the applications requires a 1-flow nozzle and
three of the applications require a 2-flow nozzle.
High Proximity Application: 35 in. to 40 in. (89 to 102 cm) above
the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 1 nozzle, Part No.
419335.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating this is a one-flow noz-
zle and must be counted as one flow number.
One 1 N nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 in.2
(6968 cm2) with the maximum longest side of 36 in. (91 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be
positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to a maximum of
2 in. (5 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed to the midpoint of the
cooking surface. See Figure 39 and 40.
NOTICE
When using this type of griddle protection, only
5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5 gal (5.7 L)
system and only 11 flow numbers are allowed
on a 3 gal (11.4 L) system.
L
+ I
I MIDPOINT; i
COOKING SURFACE
I I
h
I I
II
1 N NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0-2 IN. (0-5 cm) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 39
000241
Griddle Protection 290 (2-Flow) Nozzle - High Proximity
Application
Option 1 - Nozzle Center Located
' 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No.
419342.
The nozzle tip is Stamped with 290 indicating this is a 2-flow noz-
zle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 720 in.2
(4645 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 30 in. (76 cm).
When using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the nozzle
must be positioned within 1 in. (2.5 cm) of the center of the cook-
ing surface and pointed vertically down. See Figure 41 and 42.
CENTER LINE OF GRIDDLE
SURFACE * 1 IN. (2 cm) IN
ANY DIRECTION
I 501N.
I (127 cm)
MAXIMUM I HEIGHT
I 0F290
t NOZZLE TIP
I 301N.
(76 cm)
MINIMUM I HEIGHT I 0F290
NOZZLE
TIP
FIGURE 41
000244
COOKING
NOZZLE
AREA
1 IN. (2 cm)
LOCATION - .d4 MAXIMUM
FIGURE 42
FIGURE 40
000773 S
000243
I I NOZZLE LOCATION
(I 0-2 IN. (0-5cm) I INSIDE PERIMETER 50 IN.
OF COOKING SURFACE (127 cm)
I MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
O F 260
/,-
NOZZLE TIP
/ I 30 IN. (76cm) I
/ / I MINIMUM I
IGHT HEIGHT I
O2RO I I -.
/ NOZZLE TIP
000242
EDGE
OF -
COOKING
SURFACE
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-19
7-1-09 REV 4
S Griddle Protection 260 (2-Flow) Nozzle - High Proximity
Application
Option 2 - Nozzle Perimeter Located
30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No.
419341.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 260 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 in.2
(9290 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be
positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 2 in.
(5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking
surface. See Figure 43 and 44.
Griddle Protection 290 (2-Flow) Nozzle - Medium Proximity I Application
I Option 2a - Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued)
20 in. to 30 in. (51 cm to 76 cm) above the cooking surface.
The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No.
419342.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 in.2
(9290 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must
be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside
perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See
Figure 45 and 46.
S
FIGURE 43
000243
COOKING AREA
r t- CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
/+ HOLING
AREA
AIM POINT
290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0-2 IN. (0-5CM) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 45
000241
COOKING AREA
r F__
MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE
COOKING
-V
I
AREA
AIM POINT
NOZZLE LOCATION
0-2 IN. (0-5
CM)
INSIDE PERIMETER 30 IN.
— 14— OF COOKING SURFACE I (76 cm)
MAXIMUM I HEIGHT
OF 290
/0IN(5
NOZZLE TIP
cm) I
/ I MINIMUM I
HEIGHT I
/ 0F290 I
i L NOZZLE TIP
260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0-2 IN. (0-5cm) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE.
COOKING SURFACE EDGE
EDGE OF
COOKING
SURFACE
FIGURE 44
000241 FIGURE 46
000243
0
Griddle Protection 2W (2-Flow) Nozzle - Low Proximity
Application
Option 2c - Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued)
10 in. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity application uses the 2W nozzle, Part No.
419337.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 2W indicating this is a two-flow noz-
zle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 2W nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 in.2
(6967.7 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (91.4 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be
positioned along the perimeter to 9 in. (22.9 cm) inside perimeter,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 49 and
50.
OVERHEAD VIEW
36 IN. (91.4 cm)
S
0- 10 IN. (0-CENTERUN25.4 cm> FREOM
MAX.
0-10 IN. -
(0-25 cm) FROM CENTERLINE MAX.
2W NOZZLE AIM POINT
0-3 IN. (0-7.6 cm) TO REAR OF
COOKING SURFACE CENTER
tINE WHEN 2W NOZZLE IS
POSITIONED AT OR TO THE
REAR OF CENTER LINE 30 IN. -c (76.2 cm)
2W NOZZLE AIM POINT MAX.
D-3 IN. (0-7.6 cm) FORWARD
DF COOKING SURFACE CEN-
TER LINE WHEN 2W NOZZLE
IS POSITIONED AT OR FOR-
WARD OF COOKING SURFACE CENTER LINE
008149
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-20
REV. 5 7-1-09
Griddle Protection 2120 (2-Flow) Nozzle - Low Proximity
Application
Option 2b - Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued)
10 in. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle, Part No.
419343.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 2120 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 in.2
(9290 cm2) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must
be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perime-
ter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure
47 and 48.
I NOZZLE LOCATION I 0-2 IN. (0-5cm)
/11 I I INSIDE PERIMETER 20 IN.
OF COOKING SURFACE (51 cm)
I MAXIMUM I HEIGHT I OF 2120
/0
NOZZLE TIP
IN. (25 cm) I
/ I MINIMUM I
HEIGHT I I 0F2120 I NOZZLE TIP
I I
I
I
000243
EDGE OF
COOKING SURFACE
FIGURE 47
000243 AIM POINT 9 IN. (22.9 cm)
FROM EITHER SIDE OF
COOKING AREA COOKING SURFACE
FIGURE 49
FRONT VIEW
2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN O-2 IN. (0-5 CM) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 48
000241
F CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
I I COOKING /+ I I AT
AIM POINT
0 -3 IN. (76.2 cm)
NOTE: A 2W NOZZLE CAN PROTECT A GRIDDLE
WITH A MAXIMUM COOKING SURFACE
OF 30 IN X 36 IN. (76.2 cm 91.4cm), AT
HEIGHT OF 10-20 IN. (25.4- 50.8 cm).
THE 2W NOZZLE CAN BE POSITIONED A
MAXIMUM OF ± 10 IN. (25.4 cm) FOR-
WARD OR BEHIND COOKING SURFACE
CENTER LINE AND A MAXIMUM OF 3 IN.
(7.6 cm) AWAY FROM EITHER SIDE OF
THE COOKING SURFACE, AIMED IN 9 IN.
(22.9 cm) TO A POINT 0- 3 IN. (0- 22.0
I. FORWARD OR TO THE REAR OF \ THE COOKING SURFACE CENTER LINE
AIM POINT 9 IN.
(22.9 cm) FROM
EITHER SIDE OF
COOKING SURFACE
(50.8 CM)
MAX.
10 IN.
(25.4 cm)
MIN.
008150
FIGURE 50
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-21
7-1-09 REV 4
GriddIe Protection 1W (1-Flow) Nozzle - Low Proximity
Application
15 in. to 20 in. (38.1 cm to 50.8 cm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity 1-flow nozzle application for the protection of
griddles requires the 1W nozzle, Part No. 419336.
The nozzle tip is stamped with 1W indicating that this is a one-flow
nozzle and must be counted as one flow number.
When using the 1W nozzle for low proximity griddle protection with
our without obstruction, the maximum length of the cooking sur-
face to be protected must not exceed 26 in. (66.0 cm). The nozzle
must be centered at one end of the maximum 26 in. (66.0 cm)
length, aimed along a centerline to a point 20 in. (50.8 cm) from
the end of the length, protecting a maximum width of 20.5 in.
(52.1 cm).
The 1W nozzle tip must be positioned at or below the obstruction,
if present. The protected area begins at the point straight down
from the nozzle tip. The nozzle can be positioned above the edge
of the hazard area to be protected. See Figures 51 and 52.
Note: If the hazard area exceeds the single nozzle coverage list-
ed above, additional nozzles will be required. The additional noz-
zle can be positioned in front at high proximity or at the side at low
proximity.
LIN.15 I AIM
(38 —51 cm) \. POINT
I_
20 IN. I (51 m/
0000
007924
FIGURE 51
PROTECTED AREA
9N. I I (23cm)
20.5 IN.
(52 cm)
L-----------I ____ 007926
- AIM POINT -
20 IN.
—(51 CM) —
26 IN.
(66 cm)
FIGURE 52
I
MAXIMUM INTER
BROILER SIZE 4
(109 X 79 cm)
000245
q.
7.5 cm)
FIGURE 53
FIGURE 54
000247
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW
-. 12 IN. (30.5 cm)
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM INTERNAL
BROILER SIZE
32 X 34 IN.
(81 x 86 cm)
FIGURE 55
000248
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-22
REV. 5 7-1-09
Chain Broiler Protection
The following listed protection guidelines can be applied to any
manufacturer's chain broilers, if the chain broiler meets the speci-
fied parameters. Chain broilers utilizing catalytic converters can
be protected from overhead using model specific protection iden-
tified in the "Specific Application by Model" section in System
Design. Or, they can be protected with standard 1 N nozzle hori-
zontal chain broiler protection with the nozzles positioned at either
end of the chain broiler openings. Refer to the Horizontal Chain
Broiler Protection section for specific design information.
Horizontal Chain Broiler Protection
The R-1 02 system can use two 1 Nozzles (Part No. 419335) for
horizontal chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1 N,
indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as
one flow number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler
being protected).
Two 1 N nozzles are always needed for chain broiler protection
when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the
"Overhead Broiler Protection" requirements. The maximum inter-
nal size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (109 cm x 79 cm). The nozzles
must be positioned at each end of the enclosed cooking chamber
1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.5 cm) above the surface of the chain and a max-
imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) away from the broiler opening. The
nozzles may be mounted at either corner as long as they are at
opposite ends of the chain broiler and positioned to discharge
diagonally across the top of the chain. See Figures 53 and 54.
Overhead Chain Broiler Protection
. The R-102 system can use two 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) for
overhead chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with
1W, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted
as one flow number.
Overhead protection is only available for chain broilers with
exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the
internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal broiler
width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. (30.5 x 30.5 cm). Internal
broiler size can not be larger than 32 in. x 34 in. (81 x 86 cm).
When overhead protection is used, the nozzles must be centered
above the exhaust opening within 4 to 8 in. (10 to 20 cm) of each
other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) above
the top of the broiler surface. See Figure 55.
The nozzles may vary in position as long as they are evenly
spaced from the exhaust center and are always 1800 opposite of
each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must be posi-
tioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side of the open-
ing. See Figure 56.
FIGURE 56
000249
Note: The CB Metal Blow-off Cap must be used when using
chain broiler protection.
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-23
7-1-09 REV.8
C
S
Overhead Chain Broiler Protection (Continued)
Example No. 1 - Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in. wide
(61 x 51 cm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16 in.
(40.6 x 40.6 cm).
To determine minimum opening size, multiply the
internal length and the internal width by 0.6:
Length of opening -24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in.
(61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm)
Width of opening -20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in.
(51 cm x 0.6 = 30.5 cm)
The minimum allowable opening for overhead protec-
tion would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (36.6 x 30.5 cm).
This example would be acceptable for overhead pro-
tection.
Example No. 2 - Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in. wide
(76 x 61 cm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in.
(56 x 30 cm).
To determine minimum opening size, multiply internal
length and internal width by 0.6:
Length of opening - 30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in.
(76 cm x 0.6 = 45.7 cm)
Width of opening -24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in.
(61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm)
Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection
would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (45.7 x 36.6 cm).
Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in. x 12 in.,
the 12 in. width is below the minimum allowable cal-
culated dimension of 14.4 in. (36.6 cm) and therefore
would not be acceptable for overhead protection.
Salamander Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses three different nozzle locations for sala-
mander broiler protection. All of the design options require a one-
flow nozzle.
Salamander Broiler Protection - 1 (1-Flow) Nozzle Overhead
A salamander broiler with a maximum hazard area (internal broil-
er chamber) of 16 in. (41 cm) deep x 29 in. (74 cm) wide can be
protected using a 1 N nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is
stamped with 1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle.
The single IN nozzle must be located directly in line with either
vertical edge of the broiler opening, 6 in. (15 cm) to 12 in. (30 cm)
in front of the broiler, and 0 in. to 12 in. (30 cm) above the top of
the broiler. The nozzle must be aimed at the center of the broiler
opening. See Figure 57a.
VERTICAL EDGE
OF BROILER
OPENING 1 NOZZLE
(PART NO. 419335)
NOZZLE
LOCATION ZONE
121N.
(30 cm 6 IN. (lscm)
6 IN.
(15 cm)
AIM AT CENTER
OF BROILER
OPENING
FIGURE 57a
008426
Salamander Broiler Protection - 1 (1-Flow) Nozzle Overhead
A salamander broiler with a maximum hazard area (internal broil-
er chamber) of 15 in. (38 cm) deep x 31 in. (79 cm) wide can be
protected using a 1 F nozzle, Part No. 419333. The nozzle tip is
stamped with 1 F, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle.
The single 1 F nozzle must be located directly in line with the cen-
ter of the broiler opening, 8 in. (20 cm) to 12 in. (30 cm) in front of
the broiler and 12 in. (30 cm) to 18 in. (46 cm) above the top of the
broiler. The nozzle must be aimed at the center of the top broiler
opening when the grate is located in the middle position. The noz-
zle must be orientated so the nozzle tip flats are parallel with the
grate left to right centerline. See Figure 57b.
1 NOZZLE -*- 61N NOZZLE
(PART NO LOCATION ZONE
419333) (15 cm)
8 IN (20 cm)
41N. \\ 121N
(10 CM) \\ (30 cm)
AIM AT CENTER OF THE AIM AT CENTER OF THE TOP
TOP BROILER OPENING BROILER OPENING WHEN THE
WHEN THE GRATE IS GRATE IS LOCATED IN THE
LOCATED IN THE MIDDLE POSITIONAIM AT CENTER
MIDDLE POSITION OF BROILER OPENING
FIGURE 57b
008426
Salamander Broiler Protection - IN (1-Flow) Nozzle Local
A salamander broiler with a maximum hazard area (internal broil-
er chamber) of 15 in. (38 cm) deep x 31 in. (79 cm) wide can be
protected using 'a 1 N nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is
stamped with 1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle.
The single IN nozzle must be located above the grate on either
vertical edge of the broiler opening. The nozzle must be aimed at
the center of the grates. See Figure 57c.
FIGURE 57c
008428
AT CENTER
OF BROILER
OPENING
iN NO
AT CENTER OF
GRATES
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-24
REV. 7 7-1-09
Upright Broiler Protection
The R-1 02 system uses two 112N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) for all
upright broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1/2N, indicat-
ing that this is a half-flow nozzle. A pair of these nozzles will equal
one flow number.
Two 1/2N nozzles will protect a maximum hazard area (internal
broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (76 cm x 82.5 cm). These noz-
zles must always be used in pairs on an upright broiler. One noz-
zle must be positioned above the grate and pointed at the back
opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The second nozzle must
be pointed down into the center of the drip pan through the open
slot. See Figure 58.
UPRIGHT BROILER
BROILER CHAMBER
Gas-Radiant/Electric Char-Broiler Protection S
The R-1 02 system uses the 1 N nozzle, (Part No. 419335) for gas-
radiant/electric char-broiler protection.
The nozzle tip on the 1 N nozzle is stamped with a 1 N, indicating
that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow
number.
One IN nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of
36 in. (91 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed
864 in.2 (5574 cm2). The nozzle tip must be located 15 to
40 in. (38 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this
nozzle for gas-radiant/electric char-broiler protection, the nozzle
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the
maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at the center of the
cooking surface. See Figure 59.
40 IN.
(1 02 Cm)
I ' I MAXIMUM
N\ I15 N. (38\ I MINIMUM
S
000252
FIGURE 58 000257
FIGURE 59
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-25
7-1-09 REV. 7
S Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char-Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1 Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all
lava rock char-broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with
1 N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted
as one flow number.
One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length
of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed
312 in.2 (2013 cm2).The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 35 in. (46
to 89 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for
lava rock (ceramic) char-broiler protection, the nozzle must be
positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum
'cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 60.
COOKING
AREA COOKING
AREA
I -
I
II
I
It
/ 1 35 IN.
(89 cm)
MAXIMUM
18 1!
(46cm)
MINIMUM
I
000259
Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 1 Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all
natural charcoal broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with
1 N indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted
as one flow number.
One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum
length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not
'exceed 288 in.2 (1858 cm2). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to
40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this
nozzle for natural charcoal broiler protection, the nozzle must be
positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum
cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See
'Figure 61.
The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth of
the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm).
COOKING
AREA _+—COOKING
AREA
I - --
-
I I
I / I
I (102 cm) / 401N
It
I .
MAXIMUM
41N(10cm) k 18 IN / I (46 cm') MAXIMUM
DEPTH ! \ MINIMUM I
S
000259
5' FIGURE 60
FIGURE 61
COOKING 'l"COOKING AREA AREA
—I — N1-
Ij
I -
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-26
REV. 6 7-1-09
Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char-broiler Protection
The R-102 system may also use the 3N nozzle (Part No. 419338)
for all ceramic (lava rock) and natural charcoal char-broiler protec-
tion. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating that this is a
three-flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers.
One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length
of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed
720 in.2 (4645 cm2). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to
40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must
be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max-
imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 62.
For natural charcoal char-boiler protection, this coverage only
applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in.
(10 cm).
0.
I It
40 IN. (102 cm)
\
/
40 IN. MAXIMUM
/
I
/
(102 cm) MAXIMUM
4 IN. (10 cm) 14 IN. / I (36 cm) e IN (15cm) MAXIMUM 14 IN. DEPTH \\ I
000259
1
MINIMUM MAXIMUM (36 cm) I DEPTH MINIMUM
if if -(1 000259
FIGURE 62
FIGURE 63 0
Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Protection
The R-102 system uses the 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338) for
mesquite char-broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N
indicating that this is a three-flow nozzle and must be counted as
three flow numbers.
One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length
of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed
720 in.2 (4645 cm2). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to
40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must
be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max-
imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
See Figure 63.
Mesquite logs and pieces, no larger than 4 in. (10 cm) in diameter,
may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth of 6 in.
(15 cm).
COOKING
AREA COOKING AREA
I — — — —
Ii I I
I l
2. A 1 Nozzle, Part No. 419335, will protect a wok ii in. (28 cm)
minimum diameter up to 24 in. (61 cm) maximum diameter.
The wok depth must be no less than 3 in. (8 cm) and no
greater than 6 in. (15 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 1
indicating that this a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as
one flow number. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be
positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the wok,
aimed at the center, 30 in. to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the
hazard surface, as shown in Figure 65.
NOTICE
When Using this type of wok protection, only
5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1 1/2 gal
(5.7 L) system, and only 11 flow numbers are
allowed on a 3 gal (11.4 L) system.
MINIMUM DEPTH
3.0 IN. (7.6 cm)
MAXIMUM DEPTH
6.0 IN. (15 cm)
11 IN. (28 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER
24 IN. (61 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER
FIGURE 65
000261
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-27
7-1-09 REV. 5
5 Wok Protection
The R-102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection of
woks.
1. A 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341, will protect a wok 14 in.
(36 cm) minimum diameter up to 30 in. (76 cm) maximum
diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in.
(9.5 cm) and no greater than 8 in. (20 cm).
The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating that this is a two-
low nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as
shown in Figure 64.
NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED WITHIN 1 IN. (2 cm) RADIUS
OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK, POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN
260 NOZZLE
S 35-45 IN.
(89-114 Cm)
MINIMUM DEPTH 3.75 IN. (9.6 cm)
MAXIMUM DEPTH 8 IN. (20 cm)
LI
14 IN. (35.6 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER
30 IN. (76.2 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER
FIGURE 64 000261
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-28
REV. 6 7-1-09
Nozzle Application Chart
The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating the
quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, plenum,
or appliance.
NOTICE
This chart is for general reference only. See
complete details for each type of hazard.
Minimum
Maximum Hazard Nozzle
Hazard Dimensions Quantity
Duct or Transition Length - Unlimited 1
(Single Nozzle) Perimeter —50 in. (127 cm)
Diameter - 16 in. (40.6 cm)
Duct or Transition Length - Unlimited 1
(Single Nozzle) Perimeter - 100 in. (254 cm)
Diameter —31 7/8 in. (81 cm)
Duct or Transition Length - Unlimited 2
(Dual Nozzle) Perimeter— 150 in. (381 cm)
Diameter —48 in. (122 cm)
Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1
(At Base of Duct)
Plenum Length - lOft (3.1 m) 1
(Horizontal Protection)
Plenum Length - 6 ft (1.8 m) 1
(Horizontal Protection) Width —4 ft (1.2 m) 1
Plenum Length - 4 ft (1.2 m) 1
(Vertical Protection) Width —4 ft (1.2 m)
Fryer (Split or Maximum Size
Non-Split Vat) (without drip board)
14 in. (36 cm) x
l5 in. (38cm) 1
Low Proximity
Fryer (Split or Maximum Size
Non-Split Vat) (without drip board)
14 1/2 in. (37 cm) x
14 in. (36 cm) 1
Medium Proximity
Fryer (Split or Maximum Size
Non-Split Vat)* (without drip board)
15 in. (38 cm) x
14 in. (36 cm)
High Proximity 1
Medium Proximity 1
Fryer (Non-Split Vat Only) Maximum Size
(without drip board)
19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x
19 in. (48.2 cm)
High Proximity 1
Low Proximity V 1
Maximum Size
(without drip board)
18 in. (45.7 cm)
x 18 in. (45.7 cm)
High Proximity 1
* For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-10 and 4-11.
Nozzle Tip
Nozzle Nozzle Stamping -
Heights Part No. Flow No.
- V 430912 1W
- 419337 2W
- 419337 2W
- 419334 1/2N
- 419335 1
- 430192 1W
- 419336 1W
- 419336 1W
13—l6in. 419342 290
(33-41 cm)
16-27in. 419342 290
(41 - 69 cm)
27-47 in. 419339 230
20-27 in. 419340 245
21 —34 in. 419338 3N
13—l6in. 419342 290
25-35 in. 419338 3N
(64-89 cm) 0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-29
7-1-09 REV.6
0 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued)
Minimum
Maximum Hazard Nozzle
Hazard Dimensions Quantity
Fryer (Non-Split Maximum Size
Vat Only)* (with drip board)
21 in. (53 cm) x
14 in. (36 cm)
(Fry Pot must not exceed
15 in. x 14 in.
(38 cm x 36 cm))
High Proximity
Medium Proximity
Maximum Size
(with drip board)
25 3/8 in. (64.4 cm)
x 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm)
(Fry pot side must not
exceed 19 1/2 in.
(49.5 cm) x 19 in.
(48.2 cm)
High Proximity
Low Proximity
Maximum Size
(with drip board)
18 in. (45.7 cm)
x 27 3/4 in. (70.5 cm)
High Proximity
Fryer (Split or Maximum Size
Non-Split Vat) (with drip board)
14 in. (36 cm) x
21 in. (53 cm)
Low Proximity
Fryer (Split or Maximum Size
Non-Split Vat) (with drip board)
14 1/2 in. (37 cm) x
26 1/2 in. (67 cm)
Medium Proximity
P. Range Longest Side (High Proximity)
32 in. (81 cm)
Area —384 sq. in.
(2477 sq cm)
Longest Side (Low Proximity)
24 in. (61 cm)
Area —432 in.2
(2787 cm2)
Longest Side
28 in. (71 cm)
Area - 336 sq in.
(2168 sq cm)
Longest Side (High Proximity)
28 in. (71 cm)
Area - 672 sq in.
(4335 sq cm)
Longest Side S (Medium Proximity)
32 in. (81 cm)
Area —768 sq in.
(4955 sq cm)
j.* For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-10 and 4-11.
Nozzle Tip
Nozzle Nozzle Stamping -
Heights Part No, Flow No.
27-47 in. 419339 230
20-27 in. 419340 245
21 —34 in. 419338 3N
13—l6in. 419342 290
25 —35 in. 419338 3N
(64-89 cm)
13—l6in. 419342 290
(33 —41 cm)
16-27in. 419342 290
(41 —69 cm)
30-401n. 419335 1
(76— 102 cm)
15-20 in. 419335 1
(38-51 cm)
40-48 in. 419333 1
(102— 122 cm)
(With Backshelf)
40-50in. 419340 245
(102-127 cm)
30-40in. 419341 260
(76-102 cm)
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-30
REV. 4 7-1-09
Chart Nozzle Application (Continued)
Minimum Nozzle Tip
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping -
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No.
Range (Continued) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 15-20 in. 419342 290
36 in. (91 cm) (38 —51 cm)
Area - 1008 sq in.
(6503 sq cm)
Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30-50 in. 419341 260
48 in. (122 cm) (76-127 cm)
Area - 1440 sq in. (perimeter
(9290 sq cm) located)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30-50 in. 419342 290
30 in. (76 cm) (76 - 127 cm)
Area - 720 sq in. (center located)
(4645 sq cm)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 - 40 in. 419335/435672 1 N/l NSS
36 in. (91 cm) (89-102 cm)
Area - 1080 sq in. (perimeter located)
(6968 sq cm)
Longest Side 1 20 —30 in. 419342 290
(Medium Proximity) (51 - 76 cm)
48 in. (122 cm) (perimeter
Area - 1440 sq in. located)
(9290 sq cm)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 15-20 in. 4193336 1W
26 in. (66 cm) (38 —51 cm)
Area - 533 in.2 (center located)
(3439 cm2)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10-20 in. 419337 2W
36 in. (91 cm) (25 —51 cm)
Area - 1080 in.2 (perimeter located)
(6968 cm2)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10-20 in. 419343 2120
48 in. (122 cm) (25-51 cm)
Area - 1440 sq in. (perimeter
(9290 sq cm) located)
Chain Broiler* Longest Side —34 in. (86 cm) 2 10-26 in. 419336/432527 1W/1 WSS
(Overhead Protection) Area - 1088 sq in. (25-66 cm)
(7019 sq cm)
Chain Broiler Length - 43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 —3 in. 419335/435672 1 N/i NSS (Horizontal Protection) Width —31 in. (79 cm) (3 - 8 cm)
Gas-Radiant Char-Broiler Longest Side - 36 in. (91 cm) 1 15 —40 in. 419335/435672 iN/i NSS
Area —864 sq in. (38 - 102 cm)
(5574 sq cm)
Electric Char-Broiler Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 - 50 in. 419335/435672 iN/i NSS
Area —680 sq in. (51 - 127 cm)
(4388 sq cm)
Lava-Rock Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 - 35 in. 419335/435672 iN/i NSS
Area —312 sq in. (46-89 cm)
(2013 sq cm)
Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side —24 in. (61 cm) 1 18-40 in. 419335/435672 iN/i NSS Area —288 sq in. (46— 102 cm)
(1858 sq cm)
419334 1/2N
419335 1
419333 1
419335 1
419341 260
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-31
7-1-09 REV. 7
Nozzle Application Chart (Continued)
Minimum
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights
Lava-Rock or Natural Longest Side - 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 —40 in.
Charcoal Char-Broiler Area - 720 sq in. (36— 102 cm)
(4645 sq cm)
Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Longest Side —30 in. (76 cm) 1 14-40 in.
Area —720 sq in. (36 - 102 cm)
(4645 sq cm)
Upright Broiler Length - 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 -
Width - 30 in. (76 cm)
Salamander Length - 29 in. (74 cm) 1 -
Broiler Width - 16 in. (41 cm)
Length —31 in. (79 cm) 1 -
Width - 15 in. (38 cm)
Length —31 in. (79 cm) 1 -
Width —15 in. (38 cm)
Wok 14 in. —30 in. (36 —76 cm) 1 35 —45 in.
Diameter (89 - 114 cm)
3.75 - 8.0 in. (9.5 - 20 cm)
Deep
11 in.-24 in. (28-61 cm) 30-40 in.
Diameter (76 - 102 cm)
3.0-6.0 in. (8 - 15.2 cm)
Deep
* Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening —12 in. x 12 in. (31 cm x 31 cm), and not less than 60% of internal broiler size.
0
Nozzle Tip
Nozzle Stamping -
Part No. Flow No.
419338 3N
419338 3N
419335/435672 iN/i NSS
8 IN.
(20 cm)
6IN. .-_. 290
(15 cm) ri
AIM POINT
L--------I
FRY POT CENTERLINE
1/8 IN.
1 1/8 IN. 2.9 cm)
(29
NOZZLE
I 73/4-8 IN. ONLY
TOP OF VAFJ (19.7-20.3 m)
000282
LOW PROXIMITY (7 3/4 - 8 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT)
21/4 IN.
21/4 IN._,1 (5.7 cm)
(5.7 cm) 230 NOZZLE
FRONT EDGE
OF FRY POT 230 NOZZLE
11 IN.
(53 cm) / I 45 IN. NLY
(114 cm)
TOP OFFRYER
I' I AIM POINT
II I
L L
HIGH PROXIMITY (45 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT ONLY) 000283
FIGURE 66 S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-32
REV. 7 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL
Due to the configuration, application, and/or additional features
that pose protection problems using conventional protection, noted
in the guidelines previously addressed, the following
appliances/applications are considered hazard specific.
The following hazard specific applications have been individually
tested -and listed by make and model number of the equipment
designated.
Dean Industries Gas Fryer, Model 2424 GTI, 120,000 BTU/hr.
Rating
This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a combination of
a 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342, and a 1W nozzle, Part No. 419336,
for low proximity (7 3/4 - 8 in. nozzle height only) and two (2) 230
nozzles, Part No. 419339, for high proximity (45 in. nozzle height
only).
The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 24 in. x 24 in. (61 x 61 cm).
Nozzles must be positioned and aimed as shown in Figure 66.
Note: For low proximity protection, see Special Piping Layout in
Figure 67.
Dean Industries Model Gil Gas Fryer Special Piping Layout
Section A (Tank to Hood Penetration) Piping Limitations
Maximum Length:30 ft (9.1 m)
Maximum Rise: 6 ft (1.8 m)
Maximum Number of 900 Elbows: 7
Maximum Number of Tees: 0
Section B (Hood Penetration to Nozzles) Piping Limitations
Piping configuration shall be as shown with ±1/4 in. tolerance
on dimensions.
All nozzles shall be at the same elevation. -
Each pair of appliance nozzles shall be equally spaced from
left-to-right centerline of fryer.
1W
Ile
2 1/4 IN.
21 IN. (53.3 cm) or (5.7 cm) 24 IN. (60.9 cm)
TO GAL (11.4 L)TANK
1W
SECTION A 2 1/8 IN. 23/4 IN.
290
cm) or 21141N.
cm) (69 Cm)
HOOD PENETRATION
/ 290 k
21 IN. (53
2 1/4 IN. 24 IN. (60.9 cm) (5.7 cm
(75.2 cm) y 290 29 5/8 IN.
211/16 IN
(6.9 cm) 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or (5.7 cm) 24 IN. (60.9 cm)
2 1/4 IN.
(5.7 cm)
Li
SPECIFIC DISCHARGE PIPING FOR LOW PROXIMITY PROTECTION OF (4) FOUR DEAN INDUSTRIES MODEL OTI GAS FRYERS FIGURE 67
000244
4 1/2 IN.
(11.5 cm)
BACK OF
FRYER
SIDE VIEW OF FRYER
000265
290 NOZZLE LOCATED ON FRONT-TO-REAR CENTERLINE ± 4.5 IN. (11.4 cm) FROM
SIDE TO SIDE CENTERLINE AND AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING AREA.
FIGURE 68
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-33
7-1-09 REV. 6
S SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Far West Hospitality Products Gas Fryer, Model PAR-1 -20,
63000 BTU/hr Rating
This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a single, 290
nozzle, Part No. 419342.
The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 21 in. x 21 in. (53 x
53 cm).
The 290 nozzle must be located on the front-to-rear centerline and
aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 68.
Frymaster 14 KW - 208V Electric Fryer, Model MACH 14
Series
This specialized single vat electric fryer can be protected either
with a single 230 nozzle, Part No. 419339, located 27 in. to 47 in.
(69 cm to 120 cm) above the top surface of the fryer or with a sin-
gle 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, located 20 in. to 27 in. (51 cm to
69 cm) above the top surface of the fryer.
Either nozzle must be located anywhere along or within the
perimeter of the cooking surface and aimed at the midpoint. See
Figure 69. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip board) is
13 3/4 in. x 163/4 in. (35 cm x 42.6 cm) and the maximum size of
the cooking surface (with drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 20 7/8 in.
(35 cm x 53 cm). The vat may be divided in half to make two
split vats.
230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER
OF THE COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT.
207/8 IN. 230 NOZZLE
(53 cm) \
MAXIMUM
13
230 NOZZLE
245 27 IN.-47 IN.
/ NOZZLE (69cm—l2ocm)
ABOVE TOP
SURFACE (35 cm) I OF FRYER MAXIMUM I
245 NOZZLE
20 IN. 27IN. I
(51 cm —69 cm) I
I / I ABOVETOP I
SURFACE OF I II IFRYER
FM
163/4 IN.
(42.6 cm)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 69
000209
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-34
REV. 8 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
McDonald Fryer (Nozzle Heights of Less Than 20 In.)
When the 245 nozzle is used to protect McDonald's fryers at
heights less than 20 in. (51 cm) above the top of the fryer, the fol-
lowing appliance and distribution piping rules shall apply:
1. Each McDonald's gas or electric fryer shall be protected by
one 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The fryer vat dimensions for
one full vat or two split vats shall not exceed 14 in. x 15 in.
(36 cm x 38 cm) without the dripboard and 14 in. x 21 in.
(36 cm x 53 cm) with the dripboard.
The heat input rating of the fryer shall not exceed 122,000
BTU/HR.
The 245 nozzle shall be located 18 in. to 20 in. (46 cm to
51 cm) above the top of the fryer vat, 2 in. to 2 1/4 in. (5 cm to
5.7 cm) to the right or left of the front-to-rear vat centerline,
and 0 to 3 1/4 in. (0 cm to 8 cm) forward of the right-to-left vat
centerline, and aimed at the vat center point. See Figure 70.
REAR
NOZZLE
LOCATION
ZONES
FRONT-TO-REAR
VAT CENTERLINE
RIGHT-TO-
LEFT VAT
AIM CENTERLINE
POINT
:A
31/4 -
-_
1 14 Ii 1l I
2
I
N. 12 IN. I 21/4IN. IN, 21/4IN.
FRONT
FIGURE 70
002297
The distance between the start of the first branch line and the
start of the last branch line shall not exceed 79 in. (201 cm).
The total length of all branch lines shall not exceed 162 in.
(412 cm).
The 3 gallon agent tank shall be elevated above the connec-
tions between the supply and branch lines.
The requirements of the following table shall not be exceeded:
Duct Plenum Appliance
Supply Branch Branch Branch
Requirement Line Line Line Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 140 in. 67 in. 6 in. 42 in.
(356 cm) (170 cm) (15 cm) (107 cm)
Minimum Length 81 in. 4 in. 4 in. 17 in.
(206 cm) (10 cm) (10 cm) (43 cm)
Maximum 5 3 1 6
90° Elbows
Maximum Tees 0 1 1 1
Maximum Flow 11 2 1 2
Numbers
Minimum Flow 5 0 0 1/2
Numbers
S
TOP VIEW 51N.
(12.7 cm)
/16 IN.
7cm)
(IN.
.6 cm)
SIDE VIEW
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-34.1
7-1-09 REV. 1
[1 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Henny Penny Mono Rail Center Lift System - Models 690,
691,692
Nozzle Type: (1) One 1 nozzle, Part No. 419335 (Upper posi-
tion)
(1) One 1 nozzle, Part No. 419333 (Lower posi-
tion)
Nozzle Location:
iN Nozzle (Upper position): From the Tee Block, part No.
434424, position nozzle tip 16 in. (40.6 cm) up from base of fryer
surface and 5 in. (12.7 cm) in from right side of appliance back
shroud
1 Nozzle (Lower Position): Running down from the Tee Block,
Part No. 434424, to the base of the fryer, position the nozzle tip
2 in. (5.1 cm) from back side of fry vat, and 8 in. (20.3 cm) in from
the right side of appliance back shroud
Nozzle Aiming Point:
1 N Nozzle: At center point of fry vat
1 F Nozzle: The 1 nozzle is a flat spray nozzle and the spray must
be horizontal to that of the edge of the back lip of the fry vat
System Coverage: Each fryer requires a minimum of 3 gal
(11.4 L) of ANSULEX® Low pH agent discharging through the two
one-flow nozzles (iN and 1 F)
Note: In this application, R-102 agent storage tanks must be pres-
surized from a dedicated R-102 double-tank nitrogen cartridge.
The cartridge utilized for this hazard-specific Henny Penny fryer
protection cannot be shared with tanks intended for standard
R-102 protection. Standard protection will require an expellant gas
cartridge installed in another actuation device such as an ANSUL
AUTOMAN regulated release or regulated actuator assembly.
NOTE 1: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE AGENT DISTRIBUTION
HOSE KIT, PART NO. 435982, BE UTILIZED DURING
SYSTEM INSTALLATION.
NOTE 2: VAT DIMENSIONS -
16 IN. (40.6 cm) WIDE
20 1/4 IN. (51.4 cm) LENGTH
28 1/2 IN. (72.4 cm) DEPTH
MAXIMUM LID HEIGHT ABOVE VAT
15 IN. (38.1 an)
79116 IN.
(192 rml
FRONT VIEW
(TEE BLOCK LOCATION)
TEE
BLOCK
FIGURE 71
Note: In this application, R-102 agent storage tanks must be pres-
surized from a dedicated R-102 double-tank nitrogen cartridge.
The cartridge utilized for this hazard-specific Henny Penny fryer
protection cannot be shared with tanks intended for standard
R-102 protection. Standard protection will require an expellant gas
cartridge installed in another actuation device such as an ANSUL
AUTOMAN regulated release or regulated actuator assembly.
[1
AirAiM(DriMr 51N.
S
SIDE VIEW
FIGURE 72 C
rn)
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-34.2
REV. 1 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Henny Penny Dual Lift System - Models 580, 581, 582, 590,
591, 592, 680, 682
Nozzle Type:
iN Nozzle (Upper position): From the Tee Block, part No.
434424, position nozzle tip 16 in. (40.6 cm) up from base of fryer
surface and 5 in. (12.7 cm) in from left side of appliance back
shroud
iF Nozzle (Lower position): Running down from the Tee Block,
Part No. 434424, to the base of the fryer, position the nozzle tip
2 in. (5.1 cm) from back side of fry vat, and 8 in. (20.3 cm) in from
the left side of appliance back shroud
Nozzle Aiming Point:
'IN Nozzle: At center point of fry vat
1 F Nozzle: The 1 nozzle is a flat spray nozzle and the spray must
be horizontal to that of the edge of the back lip of the fry vat
System Coverage: Each fryer requires a minimum of 3 gal
(11.4 L) of ANSULEX Low pH agent discharging through the two
one-flow nozzles (iN and iF)
NOTE 1: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE AGENT DISTRIBUTION
HOSE KIT, PART NO. 435982, BE UTILIZED DURING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION.
NOTE 2: VAT DIMENSIONS -
16 IN. (40.6 cm) WIDE
20 1/4 IN. (51.4 cm) LENGTH
28 112 IN. (74 cm) DEPTH
MAXIMUM LID HEIGHT ABOVE VAT
15 IN. (38.1 cm)
79/16 IN. TEE
16131
(42.7
FRONT VIEW
(TEE BLOCK LOCATION)
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
U UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-34.3
7-1-09 REV. 0
S Dunkin Donuts Fryer Model DD400CGF
Nozzle Type: 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338)
Nozzle Spacing: 11.5 in. (292 mm) maximum from end of fryer
and 25.5 in. (647 mm) maximum on centers
Nozzle Height: 35 in. (889 mm) above top of appliance
Nozzle Position: 2 in. (51 mm) in from inside edge of fry vat
Nozzle Aim Point: Along the centerline of fry vat
25.5 IN.
IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(254 mm)
25.5 IN. 10 IN. (647mr
(254 mm) 25.5 IN
(6 47 m'
Krispy Kreme Fryers - Models 150 D/H, 270 D/H, 600 D/H, and
1000 D/H
Nozzle Type: 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338)
Nozzle Spacing: 11.5 in. (29.2 cm) maximum from end of
fryer and on maximum 25.5 in. (64.8 cm)
centers
Nozzle Height: 35 in. (88.9 cm) above top of appliance
Nozzle Position: 2 in. (5.1 cm) from inside edge of fry vat
Nozzle Aiming Point:Along centerline of fry vat
Note: Figure 89 shows maximum size fryer (Model 1000 D/H).
Smaller size fryers (Models 150 D/H, 270 D/H, and 600 D/H) can
be protected with less nozzles but nozzle spacings, height require-
ments, and positions, must be maintained as shown in Figure 89.
11.5 IN.
(292 mm)
S
\,-
35 IN. 122 IN. (889 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mr 25.5 IN.
25.5 IN. (647 mm)
(647 m) I
11.5 IN.
(292 mm)
007505
35 IN
(889 mm)
Fryer Specifications:
Vat Size:
Length: 122 in. (310 cm)
Width: 31.3 in. (79.5 cm)
Depth: 11 in. (28 cm)
BTU Rating: 360k
Vat Oil Capacity:
1250 lb (567 kg)
007505
FIGURE 73
FIGURE 74
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-34.4
REV.O 7-1-09
NOTES: S
S
S
Side View
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
U UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-35
7-1-09 REV. 6
S SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
DUKE Chain Broiler - Model FBB-High Proximity
DUKE Chain Broiler With or Without Catalyst View:
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle, Part No. 419337
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance
Nozzle Location: Centered 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front
feed edge of appliance. Nozzle must be oriented to spray onto
impedance plate.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of impedance plate
2W Nozzle 2W Nozzle
LOW SIDE
OF PLATE
20 in. (508 mm)
61/2 in.
(165 mm)
Front View (Feed Side)
FIGURE 75
S DUKE Chain Broiler - Model FBB - Low Proximity
DUKE Chain Broiler With or Without Catalyst View
Exhaust Deflector Size - 6.25 in. (15.9 cm) x 26.75 in.
(67.9 cm):
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 245 nozzles, Part No. 419340.
Nozzle Height: 8 in. to 15 in. (20.3 cm to 38.1 cm) above top
of appliance.
I 15 IN. -J-171/4
6112 IN. (165 mm)
381 mm3'438.15
IS FROM EDGE OF APPLIANCE l(1) THAT DEFLECTOR PLATE 009j ANGLED TOWARD
(SEE SIDE VIEW)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from front or back edge of
hazard
First nozzle positioned 17.25 in. (43.8 cm)
from right side of broiler (facing broiler)
Second nozzle positioned 15 in. (38.1 cm)
from first nozzle
Nozzle must be oriented to spray onto
impedance plate.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at at center of impedance plate
Note: If the deflector or flue-gas diverter is rotated 180 degrees,
the nozzles must also rotate to discharge into the opening.
245 NOZZLE FLUE GAS 7DIVERTER
PERFORATED
GRILL
6112 IN. (165mm) 8 IN. mm) to
FROM EDGE OF 15 IN. (381 mm) \
APPLIANCE THAT NOZZLE HEIGHT
CENTER DEFLECTOR PLATE DUCT IS ANGLED "1 TOWARD I
PRODUCT
INPUT
PRODUCT
OUTPUT
PRODUCT
INPUT BACK FRONT
S TOP VIEW
008100
SIDE VIEW
008099
FIGURE 76
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-36
REV. 5 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
DUKE Electric Broiler - Model FBB - High Proximity
DUKE Electric Broiler with or without Catalyst View
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 1 N nozzles
Nozzle Height: 18 in. (45.7 cm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from edge of appliance that
deflector plate is angled toward
First nozzle positioned 5 in. (12.7 cm) to left of
opening centerline
Second nozzle positioned 5 in. (12.7 cm) to
right of opening centerline
See Figure 77
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
(2)-1N NOZZLE
T
IN. (457 mm)
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
FROM EDGE OF NOZZLE HEIGHT
APPLIANCE THAT
_18
DEFLECTOR I
PLATE IS ANGLED I
TOWARD PRODUCT
PRODUCT
________________
INPUTI
OUTPUT I
BACK I I FRONT
SIDE VIEW 008365
10 IN. (254 (254mm) CENTERED 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) FROM ON OPENING EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT DEFLECTOR PLATE i— PERFORATED IS ANGLED TOWARD -00 G 0 0 0
0100 GRILL (SEE SIDE VIEW) 00
oIl 1 I, I 0 PRODUCT xl I I . I 0 —CENTER
OUTPUT I DUCT
0 00 0 0
000 b
0
000
I
PRODUCT 065366
INPUT
TOP VIEW FIGURE 77
DUKE Electric Broiler - Model FBB - High Proximity
DUKE Electric Broiler without Catalyst View
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (50.8 cm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from edge of appliance that
deflector plate is angled toward
See Figure 78
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
(1)- 2W NOZZLE
20 IN. (508 mm)
61/2 IN. (165 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT
FROM EDGE OF APPLIANCE THAT DEFLECTOR
PLATE IS ANGLED I
I
TOWARD PRODUCT
PRODUCT INPUT
OUTPUT
BACK I I FRONT
SIDE VIEW 008365
c
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) FROM
EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT DEFLECTOR PLATE j 1.1— PERFORATED IS ANGLED TOWARD - 0 0 0 0 0 0 I GRILL (SEE SIDE VIEW) 000 d 000
0 04. PRODUCT —0- 0 p p 0J__ CENTER
OUTPUT DUCT
PRODUCT
INPUT 008366
TOP VIEW
FIGURE 78
~11
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-37
7-1-09 REV. 5
S
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
DUKE Electric Broiler - Model FBB - Low Proximity
DUKE Electric Broiler with or without Catalyst View
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 245 nozzles
Nozzle Height: 8 in. (20.3 cm) to 15 in. (38.1 cm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from edge of appliance that
deflector plate is angled toward
First nozzle positioned 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) from
right side of broiler (facing broiler)
Second nozzle positioned 15 in. (38.1 cm) from
first nozzle
See Figure 79
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
(2) - 245 NOZZLE
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
FROM EDGE OF--I
APPLIANCE THAT
DEFLECTOR
PLATE IS ANGLED
TOWARD
PRODUCT -
OUTPUT
BACK
SIDE VIEW 008365
15 IN. 171/2IN.
81 mm) (444.5 mm
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Nieco Broiler Model 940, 962 or 960 With Catalytic Converter
Protection
Note: Nieco broilers without catalytic converters use standard
chain broiler protection options.
Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960)
are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean
air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect these
broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting these broil-
ers are as follows:
- The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in. (74 cm
x 60 cm).
- An R-102 3-gallon system with a maximum of 6 flow numbers,
must be used for protection of each broiler, including plenum
and duct.
- Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum of (2)
two, 1 N nozzles, Part No. 419335. The nozzles must be locat-
ed as shown in Figure 80.
- The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (2.5 cm) high agent bar-
riers on the angled surface of the broiler. If these have not been
completed by the equipment supplier, they must be added in
the field.
i:i 1 14.25± 1 IN.
(36 cm)
-r
8 IN. (203 mm) TO
15 IN. (381 mm)
NOZZLE HEIGHT
PRODUCT
INPUT
30
FRONT (2) IN NOZZLES
PART NO. 56930
PERFORATED
GRILL
12 INTO 13 IN.
I
L (31 cm TO 33 cm) CENTER
DUCT I f4__
61/2 IN. (165 mm) FROM
EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT DEFLECTOR PLATE
IS ANGLED TOWARD
(SEE SIDE VIEW)
PRODUCT
OUTPUT
008368
- 000250
PRODUCT
INPUT
TOP VIEW LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm) ON FIGURE 79 EACH SIDE OF BROILER CENTER LINE
14.25± 1 IN.
(36 cm)
S
- — 000774
FIGURE 80
Nieco Broiler - Model 9015 (With or Without Catalytic
Converter)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337.
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See
Figure 82.
Nozzle Location for Large Chamber: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back
from front edge of appliance. See Figure 82.
Nozzle Location for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be located
6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance and 12 in.
(305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle.
Nozzle Aiming Point for Large Chamber: Aimed at center of
opening. See Figure 82.
Nozzle Aiming Point for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be aimed
12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle aiming point.
A-
11
6 1/2 IN.
(165 mm)
(2) 2W NOZZLES
12 IN.
3 mm) H
20 IN.
(508 mm)
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-38
REV. 8 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Nieco Broiler - Model 950, 960, 980, 1424
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle, Part No. 419337.
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See
Figure 81a.
Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of
appliance. See Figure 81a.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure
81a.
Nieco Broiler - Model 950, 960, 980, 1424 (with Catalytic
Converter)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337.
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See
Figure 81b.
Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of
appliance. See Figure 81b.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure
81 b - Side View.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at point 3 in. (76 mm) each side of
center. See Figure 81b -Front View.
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER /1 6 61/2 IN. 1/2 IN.
(165 mm) "j (165 mm)
SIDE VIEW
2W NOZZLE 2W NOZZLE
3IN. 3IN. I (76 mm) (76 mm)
20 IN. 20 IN. (508 mm)' (508 mm)
I_:1 j
CENTERLINE OF CENTERLINE OF
LARGE OPENING LARGE OPENING
FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW
FIGURE 81a FIGURE 81b
006486 007034
CENTERLINE OF
LARGE OPENING
FRONT VIEW
FIGURE 82
007010
0
SIDE VIEWS
007322
FIGURE 83
004355
611
(16I
TYF
510 n)
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
. UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-39
7-1-09 REV.7
0 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Nieco Broiler - Model 9025 (With or Without Catalytic Nieco Broiler - Model MPB94 and MPB84 - High Proximity
Converter) (With/Without Catalytic Converters)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle, Part No. 419337.
Nozzle Height: 20 1/2 in. (521 mm) above top of appliance. See Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of converter. See
Figure 83. Figure 84.
Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of Nozzle Location: Centered 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from any
appliance. See Figure 83. edge of the appliance. See Figure 84.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each opening. See Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure
Figure 83. 84.
4E / TOP VIEW 61/2 IN. (165 mm)TYP.
ANY SIDE
- - -
6 1/2 IN.
(165 mm)
lo
SIDE VIEW
CENTERLINE CENTERLINE
OF OPENING OF OPENING
FRONT VIEW
(2) 2W NOZZLES
18-20 1/2 IN.
(457.521 mm)
---- I----1----I
007323
0. FIGURE 84
006487
0
AIM POINT
245 NOZZLE
245 NOZZLE
AIM POINT
BACK
-r 7112 IN
(191 mn
4 71/2 IN (191 mn
6112 IN.
(165 mm)'
AIM POINT
245 NOZZLE
-
245 NOZZLE
BACK
-r
71/2 IN (191 mn
4 71/2 IN (191 mn
1
(165 mm)
FRONT
00809 008097
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW
FRONT
245 NOZZLE
6112 IN. (165 mm) l L\
245 NOZZLE
61/2 IN. (165 mm) l
SIDE VIEW 008098 SIDE VIEW 008098
FIGURE 85 FIGURE 86
Iii
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-40
REV.6 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Nieco Broiler - Model MPB94 - Low Proximity (With or
Without Catalytic Converter)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 245 nozzles, Par: No. 419340.
Nozzle Height: 8 into 15 in. (20.3 to 38.1 cm) measured from top
of converter
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from front or back edge of
hazard.
First nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (19.1 cm) to the
right from center of hazard.
Second nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (19.1 cm) to
the left from center of hazard.
See Figure 85.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at opening on respective center
lines
Nieco Broiler - Model MPB84 - Low Proximity (With Catalytic
Converter)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 245 nozzles, Part No. 419340.
Nozzle Height: 8 in. to 15 in. (20.3 to 38.1 cm) measured from top
of converter
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from front or back edge of
hazard.
First nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (19.1 cm) to the
right from center of hazard.
Second nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (19.1 cm) to
the left from center of hazard.
See Figure 86.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at opening on respective center
lines
[11
S
(2) - 1 N NOZZLE
—c-
-
FRONT
006370
7112 IN. (191 mm)
71/2 IN. (191 mm)
L
61/2 IN. (165 mm)
FROM FRONTOR -o
BACK EDGE
BACK
FRONT
008370
5 IN. (127 mm)
5 IN. (127 mm) L
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
FROM FRONT OR -.
BACK EDGE
BACK
ro I0 0
AIM
I POINT POOP IOCP
000
bOoO
0000
-..----
y&,
O&
-0
0IJ0U
p000 0 0
oT
hL
F
IO OI
Lo c
AIM
bodo 0000 I
-'----'--°d
'& I
0uoI.,
0o0 l
'AIM
L.0
% °0 POINT
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-41
7-1-09 REV 6
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Nieco Broiler - Model MPB84 and MPB94 - High Proximity
(With Perforated Cap OR with Catalytic Converter and
Chimney)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 1 N nozzles
Nozzle Height: 18 in. (45.7 cm) to 20 in. (50.8 cm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) from front or back edge of haz-
ard
First nozzle positioned 5 in. (12.7 cm) to left of
opening centerline
Second nozzle positioned 5 in. (12.7 cm) to
right of opening centerline
See Figure 87
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
(2)-IN NOZZLE
WITH OR WITHOUT
CHIMNEY
61/2 IN. (165 mm) 18 IN. (457 mm)TO
FROM FRONT ....g.] . 20 IN. (508 mm)
OR BACK EDGE I.-4... —½-. - .......... NOZZLE HEIGHT
0. Nieco Broiler - Model MPB84 and MPB94 - Low Proximity
(With Perforated Cap OR with Catalytic Converter and
Chimney)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 245 nozzles
Nozzle Height: 8 in. (20.3 cm) to 15 in. (38.1 cm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 (16.5 cm) from front or back edge of hazard
First nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (19.1 cm) to the
right of hazard centerline
Second nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (19.1 cm) to
the left of hazard centerline
See Figure 88
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
(2) - 245 NOZZLE WITH OR WITHOUT
CHIMNEY
61/2 IN. (165 mm) 8 IN. (203 mm)TO
FROM FRONT 15 IN. (381 mm)
OR BACK EDGE I _ NOZZLE HEIGHT
PRODUCT PRODUCT
PRODUCT PRODUCT OUTPUT -
OUTPUT...
BACK I FRONT
BACK I FRONT SIDE VIEW 008369
SIDE VIEW 008369
(2) - 245 NOZZLE
c. TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
FIGURE 87 FIGURE 88
0
S
Marshall Air Electric Broiler — Model FR14B AutoBroil
Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 260 Nozzle (Part No. 419341)
Nozzle Height: 15-20 in. (38.1 —50.8 cm) above the
top of the broiler
Nozzle Location: The nozzle must be centered above the
front edge of the broiler
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at the center of the exhaust
opening of the broiler. See Figure 90.
24.25 IN. 14.50 IN. (31.6 cm) (36k cm)
15 20 IN.
241N.
3469 IN ?-"- (61.0 cm)
(88.1 cm
)48 IN.
& 4'
(121.9
CENTERED ON CONVERTER
CONVERTER
\
TWO 1W NOZZLES
003418a
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-42
REV.7 7-1-09
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)
Marshall Air —Model 2001 BK Multi-Chamber Broiler
Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 1W nozzles, Part No. 419347.
Nozzle Location: Front nozzle tip must be located 14 in. direct-
ly above the appliance, aligned with the front face and centerline
of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. forward of the
front edge of the converter on the centerline.
The rear nozzle tip is a mirror image of the front. The rear noz-
zle is located 14 in. vertically above the appliance, aligned with lo the "rear" face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim
point is 4 in. behind the "rear" edge of the converter on the cen-
terline. See Figure 89.
System Limitation: Maximum of 5 flows for a 3.0 gallon sys-
tem: Remaining flow points available may be used to protect
other hazards.
FRONT VIEW• S
NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH FRONT OF CONVERTER
NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH BACK
FRONT OF CONVERTER, OF CONVERTER, AIMED
AIMED 4 IN. (102 mm) BACK 4 IN. (102 mm) FORWARD
I1W 1W
) NOZZLE NOZZLE
- 141N. ' 141N.
(356 mm) (10 IN.m) -i"I (356 + mm) 2 m
003416B
SIDE VIEW
0. FIGURE 89
FIGURE 90
006737
Grease Grabber-8OTm Two Stage Filtration System
The Grease Grabber-80 Twc Stage Filtration System consists of
two components:The primary filter (The Grease-X Tractor) and the
secondary filter (The Grease Grabber-80).
The protection required for this application is the same as the stan-
dard plenum/filter protection: One (1)1 N Nozzle, Part No. 419335,
protecting 10 (3.1 m) linear feet of plenum length by 4 ft (1.2 m) of
plenum chamber depth (width), positioned 2-4 in. (5-10 cm) from
peak of secondary filter. See Figure 91.
r
4FT.(1.2m)
A
ONDA
ER i r
NOZZLE
FILTER
rL \ 2-4 IN.
(5-10 cm)
LH
NOTE TWO NOZZLES MUST BE UTILIZED FOR V-BANK FILTER
ARRANGEMENT. 1 0
FIGURE 91
006526
COVER MUST NOT
INTERFERE WITH
EDGE OF
DISCHARGE
PAUERN I
06 IN. (0.15 cm)
If
4045 IN.
I (1-1.1 M)
I)
1 ZONE
ZONE CENTER LINE
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-43
7-1-09 REV. 6
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE
Overlapping Coverage - Option 1
For each group of protected appliances under a common hood(s),
the overlapping nozzles must be located from right to left so that
each end nozzle is located a maximum of 6 in. (15.2 cm) inside the
outside edge of the cooking hazard of each end appliance, and the
inside overlapping nozzles must be located between the two end
nozzles at a maximum spacing of 12 in. (30.5 cm).
Hazard Zone
The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rectan-
gular surface, that includes all of the cooking hazards of the pro-
tected appliances under a common hood(s). The purpose of the
hazard zone is to provide a means of locating the appliances and
the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping noz-
zles. The hazard zone measures 28 in. (71.1 cm) deep by the
length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard zone
must bisect the 28 in. (71.1 cm) depth (from front to back) and run
from right-to-left for the full width of the hazard zone.
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protection
of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly at uniform ele-
vations under a common hood(s). Overlapping protection of appli-
ances is continuous for the full length of the hood or divided when
group(s) of protected appliances are separated by counters or
appliances not requiring protection.
Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping noz-
zle appliance protection that covers the appliance line-up located
under the total hood length. All appliances requiring protection are
the appliances under the hood that can be an ignition source of
grease in the hood, grease removal device or the duct.
Group protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance pro-
tection that protects individual hazard zones located under a com-
mon hood. These "groups" of appliances may be separated by
appliances not requiring protection, such as steam equipment or
work tables, or by dedicated appliance protection, such as sala-
mander broilers.
See Figure 91d (full hood continuous protection) and Figure 91e
(multiple group protection).
Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection
Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined
as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed cooking haz-
ards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected with
overlapping nozzles and therefore must be protected with nozzles
dedicated to the appliance.
General Design Limitations
Maximum depth of zone is 28 in. (71.1 cm).
The 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, is the only approved nozzle for
overlapping (zone) protection.
Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 6 in. (0 cm to 15.2 cm) forward
of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone centerline.
Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 6 in. (15.2 cm) from
each end of hazard and then a maximum of 12 in. (30.5 cm) on
center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the complete
hazard is covered.
For appliance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceed-
ing the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (71.1 cm) in depth, the
hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the
hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front edge of
the zone. See Appliance Chart, Table 1.
For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protec-
tion sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align entire hazard
surface area within the multiple zones.
All hood, duct, individual appliance, and piping limitations are as
specified in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and
Maintenance Manual, Part No. 418087.
All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design
Manual, Part No. 418087, is also approved protection. Zone pro-
tection can be considered optional protection.
TABLE 1
Overlapping Nozzle Coverage (Zone Protection)
Appliance Type Maximum Cooking Hazard
Fryer 34 in. (86.4 cm) Deep x 5.8 ft2
(0.5 m2)
Griddle 30 in. (76.2 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Range 28 in. (71.1 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Wok, Maximum 30 in. (76.2 cm) Diameter x 8 in.
(20.3 cm) Deep
Wok, Minimum 11 in. (27.9 cm) Diameter x 3 in.
(7.6 cm) Deep
Braising Pan/Tilt 34 in. (86.4 cm) Deep x Unlimited
Skillet* Length
Lava Rock 32 in. (81.3 cm) Deep x Unlimited
Char-Broiler Length
Charcoal Broiler 32 in. (81.3 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
(4 in. (10.2 cm) Maximum Fuel Depth)
Mesquite Wood 32 in. (81.3 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Broiler (12 in. (30.5 cm) Maximum Fuel Depth)
Gas Radiant 36 in. (91.4 cm) Deep x Unlimited
Char-Broiler Length
Electric Char-Broiler 34 in. (86.4 cm) Deep x 20 in. (50.8 cm)
* See Figure 91a for nozzle location
FIGURE 91a
006927
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-43.1
REV. 0 7-1-09
S OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued)
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations
All overlapping appliance nozzles must be the "245" nozzle,
Part No. 419340, and must be located under a common hood
at the same height above the hazard zone, in a straight line
from right to left and aimed at the centerline of the hazard
zone. The overlapping nozzle is used for both continuous over-
lapping and multiple group overlapping protection.
The hazard zone must be positioned (located) so that all appli-
ance hazard surfaces are within the zone. For appliance haz-
ard surfaces with listed protection exceeding the standard
hazard zone size of 28 in. (71 cm) in depth (see Table 1), the
hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the
hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front of the
zone.
The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 40 in. to
45 in. (1 m to 1.1 m) above the top surface of the protected
appliances. See Figure 91c.
Exception No. 1: Nozzle dimensions for wok protection are
measured to bottom of wok. Exception No. 2: When using
overlapping appliance nozzles in areas where there is a back
shelf, the nozzle cannot be positioned in the shaded area as
shown in Figure 91b.
Also, back shelf must not extend more than 11 in. (27.9 cm)
over the hazard zone and cannot be less than 20 in. (50.8 cm)
above the hazard zone. See Figure 91b.
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE(S)
45 - CANNOT BE POSITIONED
I IN THIS SHADED AREA
43111 42111
41 I I I
40HlI
65432
CENTER LINE OF
HAZARD ZONE
BACK
SHELF '7
I
ll IN. (27.9 cm)
MAXIMUM 20 IN.
(50.8 cm)
MINIMUM
28 IN. (71.1 cm)
FIGURE 91b
006914
The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 0 in. to
6 in. (0 cm to 15.2 cm) forward of the centerline or aimline of
the selected hazard zone. See Figure 91 c.
245 NOZZLE - NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED STRAIGHT
DOWN OR BACK AT CENTERLINE OF
HAZARD ZONE
- (15.2 CM) -I
6 IN. 45 IN.
(1.1 m)
40 IN.
(1m)
FRONT BACK OF ZONE - V
OF ZONE L 28 IN HAZARD ZONE
(
CENTERLINE OF
ZONE
FIGURE 91c
006915
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-43.2
7-1-09 REV.0
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) 2. When obstructions are located adjacent to appliance(s) pro-
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations - tected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping appliance noz-
Group Protection zie spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to the
1. For each group of protected appliances under a common
obstruction. See Figure 91f.
hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right to 6 IN i 12 IN. i 121N 12 IN. 12 IN.
1(30.5 cm' I(° cm) (30.5 cm)I (30.5 cm) left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 6 in. (15.2 cm) . . 6 IN.
(15.2 cm) inside the outside edge of the cooking hazard of MAX. 4 MAX. 4 -MAX. 4 -MAX.4 MAX. 4 (15.2 cm)
MAX. each end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must I I
be located between the two end nozzles at a maximum spac- I
ing of 12 in. (30.5 cm). See Figures 91d and 91e. I
OUTSIDE
EDGE OF
12 IN. (30.5 Cm) MAXIMUM COOKING '.1 SPACING(S) BETWEEN HAZARD
OVERLAPPING NOZZLES I I I I
'I-'' I'
'I ' / MAXIMUM
(15.2 cm) / / ' ' I \ / 'I. (15.2 cm)
6IN. / I \ , . 61N.
MAXIMUM
HAZARD AREA
I
/
FROM
EDGE OF / !\
FROM OBSTRUCTION
COOKING / \ / \ EDGE OF COOKING FIGURE 911
001713 HAZARD / / ' / ' / / \ HAZARD
3. When an appliance requires dedicated protection with a pro-
tected area intended for overlapping appliance nozzle protec-
tion, the group protection option will be required for appliances
on either side of the appliances using dedicated protection.
Group protection using overlapping appliance nozzles must FULL HOOD CONTINUOUS APPLIANCE PROTECTION begin with the protected appliance(s) adjacent to the dedicat-
S
FIGURE 91d ed appliance protected. An overlapping appliance nozzle(s)
001710 must be positioned within 6 in. (15.2 cm) of the edge(s) of the
appliance hazard surface area(s) adjacent to the dedicated
nozzle protection. See Figure 91g.
12 IN. (30.5 cm) 6 IN. (15.2 cm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM I EDGE OF COOKING
HAZARD
I6IN 6 IN.
12 IN. (15.2 cm) + 12 IN. + $ 12 IN. $ 12 IN. (15.2 cm) I I
I I
MAXIMUM FROM (15.2 cm) I(30.5 cm)I MAXIMUM I I (30.5 cm) MAXIMUM 6 IN. (30.5 cm (30.5 cm)) 6 IN. I j ' (15.2 Cm) EDGE MAX. IdMAX.I FROM
_____.\ /
_
EDGE OF _____________________ ______________
MAX. MAX.
MAX. COOKING I EDGE 6 IN. (15.2 ci)
HAZARD HAZARD
OF MAXIMUM I
- M
MAXIMUM OF
6 IN. (15.2 cm) EDGE HAZARD I I EDGE OF I I HAZARD
COOKING
I COOKING I I COOKING I I COOKING I I HAZARD
GROUP APPLIANCE PROTECTION
FIGURE 91e
001720
DEDICATED NOZZLE
APPLIANCE
FIGURE 91g
001756
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-43.3
REV. 0 7-1-09
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued)
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations -
Group Protection (Continued)
4. On protected appliances, all hazard surfaces located in a
group must be within 40-45 in. (102-114 cm) from the noz-
zle(s). Once that dimension is exceeded, a new group must be
started. See Figure 91 h.
Note: The supply pipe feeding nozzle groups is to be at the
same elevation. Adjust height for each group only by varying
lengths of nozzle drops.
6 IN. (15.2 cm) 6 IN. (15.2 cm)
MAXIMUM -i MAXIMUM
t I I NOZZLES
NOZZLES
I . 40 IN.
40 IN. 45 IN. (114 cm) I 451N (102 cm)
(102 cm) 1(114cm)
FIGURE 91h S
006917
Detection Requirements For Overlapping Appliance
Protection .
When utilizing overlapping appliance protection, fusible link detec-
tors must be installed on a maximum of 2 ft (0.61 m) centers,
starting with detectors located in (under) the duct opening(s).
Starting from the detector under the duct opening, add detectors
on 2 ft (0.61 m) maximum spacing until the complete length of the
plenum area is covered, from one end to the other. The location of
the last detector on each end of the plenum must not exceed
2 ft (0.61 m) from end of plenum.
Note: Standard detector coverage, as specified in "Design
Section," is acceptable when utilizing dedicated nozzle cov-
erages.
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-43.4
7-1-09 REV. 0
S OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued)
r Overlapping Coverage - Option 2
For each group of protected appliances under a common hood(s),
the overlapping nozzles must be located from right to left so that
each end nozzle is located a maximum of 11.5 in. (29.2 cm) inside
the outside edge of the cooking hazard of each end appliance, and
the inside overlapping nozzles must be located between the two
end nozzles at a maximum spacing of 25.5 in. (64.8 cm).
Hazard Zone
The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rectan-
gular surface, that includes all of the cooking hazards of the pro-
tected appliances under a common hood(s). The purpose of the
hazard zone is to provide a means of locating the appliances and
the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping noz-
zles. The hazard zone measures 28 in. (711 mm) deep by the
length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard zone
must bisect the 28 in. (711 mm) depth (from front to back) and run
from right-to-left for the full width of the hazard zone.
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protection
of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly at uniform ele-
vations under a common hood(s). Overlapping protection of appli-
ances is continuous for the full length of the hood or divided when
group(s) of protected appliances are separated by counters or
appliances not requiring protection.
Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping noz-
zle appliance protection that covers the appliance line-up located
under the total hood length. All appliances requiring protection are
the appliances under the hood that can be an ignition source of
grease in the hood, grease removal device or the duct.
Group protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance pro-
tection that protects individual hazard zones located under a com-
mon hood. These "groups" of appliances may be separated by
appliances not requiring protection, such as steam equipment or
work tables, or by dedicated appliance protection, such as sala-
mander broilers.
See Figure 95 (full hood continuous protection) and Figure 96
(multiple group protection).
Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection
Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined
as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed cooking haz-
ards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected with
overlapping nozzles and therefore must be protected with nozzles
dedicated to the appliance.
General Design Limitations
If overlapping appliance protection is mixed with dedicated appli-
ance protection on the same pipe system, THE OVERLAPPING
APPLIANCE PROTECTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS MUST
BE FOLLOWED.
Overlapping protection requires the use of 3.0 gal (11.4 L)
Itank(s) and a maximum of six (6) flows per tank.
In installations using tanks only intended for overlapping protec-
tion, a single Double Tank nitrogen expellant gas cartridge can
be utilized with up to three (3) 3.0 gal (11.4 L) tanks.
In installations using both overlapping protection and conven-
tional non-overlapping protection (ex. hood/duct or dedicated
appliance protection), a single Double Tank nitrogen expellant
gas cartridge can be utilized with up to three (3) 3.0 gal (11.4 L)
tanks, as long as none of the 3.0 gal (11.4 L) tanks exceed a
total flow output of more than six (6) flows.
If more than six (6) flows will be used in a conventional non-
overlapping tank, it cannot share the same cartridge as tanks
intended for overlapping protection. In this case, an additional
Regulated Actuator Assembly with another expellant gas car-
tridge will be required.
The 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, must be used for "end of zone"
protection.
The 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341, must be used for zone pro-
tection.
Maximum depth of zone is 28 in. (71.1 cm).
Refer to overlapping system piping requirements listed in Table 2.
Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 12 in. (0 cm to 30.5 cm) forward
of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone centerline.
Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 11.5 in. (29.2 cm) from
each end of hazard and then a maximum of 25.5 in. (64.8 cm)
on center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the com-
plete hazard is covered.
For appliance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceed-
ing the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (71 cm) in depth, the haz-
ard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the hazard
zone, with the front edge overhanging the front edge of the zone.
See Appliance Chart, Table 1.
For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protec-
tion sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align entire hazard
surface area within the multiple zones.
All hood, duct, and individual appliance protection are as speci-
fied in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Mainten-
ance Manual, Part No. 418087.
All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design
Manual, Part No. 418087, is also approved protection. Zone pro-
tection can be considered optional protection.
0
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued)
TABLE 1
Overlapping Nozzle Coverage (Zone Protection)
Appliance Type Maximum Cooking Hazard
Fryer 34 in. (86.4 cm) Deep x 5.8 ft2 (0.5 m2)
Griddle 30 in. (76.2 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Range 30 in. (76.2 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Wok, Maximum 30 in. (76.2 cm) Diameter x 8 in.
(20.3 cm) Deep
Wok, Minimum 11 in. (27.9 cm) Diameter x 3 in.
(7.6 cm) Deep
Braising Pan/Tilt 34 in. (86.4 cm) Deep x Unlimited Skillet* Length
Lava Rock 26 in. (66.0 cm) Deep x Unlimited
Char-Broiler (see Note 1) Length
Charcoal Broiler 30 in. (76.2 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
(4 in. (10.2 cm) Maximum Fuel Depth)
Mesquite Wood 30 in. (76.2 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Broiler (6 in. (15.2 cm) Maximum Fuel Depth)
Gas Radiant 36 in. (91.4 cm) Deep x Unlimited
Char-Broiler Length
Electric Char-Broiler 34 in. (86.4 cm) Deep x Unlimited Length
* See Figure 92 for nozzle location
Note 1: Always try to place Lava Rock Char-Broiler(s) near the center of the
zone. When the Lava Rock Char-Broiler is the first or last appliance in the zone,
the outside edge of the broiler must not be more than 6 in. (15 cm) outside the
end nozzle.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-44
REV. 6 7-1-09
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations
All overlapping appliance nozzles must be the 245 nozzle,
Part No. 419340, for "end of zone" protection and the 260 noz-
zle, Part No. 419341, for zone protection, and must be located
under a common hood at the same height above the hazard
zone, in a straight line from right to left and aimed at the cen-
terline of the hazard zone. The overlapping nozzle is used for
both continuous overlapping and multiple group overlapping
protection.
The hazard zone must be positioned (located) so that all appli-
ance hazard surfaces are within the zone. For appliance haz-
ard surfaces smaller than the standard hazard zone size, the
hazard surface can be located anywhere within the standard
hazard zone. For appliance hazard surfaces with listed pro-
tection exceeding the standard hazard zone size of 28 in.
(71 cm) in depth (see Table 1), the hazard surface(s) must be
aligned with the back edge of the hazard zone, with the front
edge overhanging the front of the zone.
The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 40 in. to
45 in. (1 m to 1.1 m) above the top surface of the protected
appliances. See Figure 94.
Exception No. 1: Nozzle dimensions for wok protection are
measured to bottom of wok. Exception No. 2: When -using
overlapping appliance nozzles in areas where there is a back
shelf, the nozzle cannot be positioned in the shaded area as
shown in Figure 93.
Also, back shelf must not extend more than 11 in. (27.9 cm)
over the hazard zone and cannot be less than 18 in. (45.7 cm)
above the hazard zone. See Figure 93.
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE(S)
45 CANNOT BE POSITIONED
44 IN THIS SHADED AREA
43
42 41
40
12108642
._ CENTER LINE OF
HAZARD ZONE
BACK
SHELF
11 IN. (27.9 cm)
MAXIMUM.
4 181N.
(45.7 cm)
MINIMUM
4 28 IN. (71.1 cm)
FIGURE 93
006914
COVER MUST NOT
INTERFERE WITH
EDGE OF
DISCHARGE
PATTERN I
1.4__44 0-12 IN.
I 1 (0-30.5 cm)
it 40-45 IN.
I M)
ZONE
I,
I)
I ZONE
ZONE CENTER LINE FIGURE 92
006927
11.5 IN.-,.l
(29.2 Cm)
MAXIMUM
FROM
EDGE OF
COOKING
HAZARD
\ .- 11.5 IN.
(29.2 cm)
MAXIMUM
FROM
EDGE OF
COOKING
- HAZARD
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
. UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-45
7-1-09 REV.4
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued)
4. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 0 in. to
12 in. (0 cm to 30.5 cm) forward of the centerline or aimline of
the selected hazard zone. See Figure 94.
I 245 OR 260 NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED STRAIGHT
DOWN OR BACK AT CENTERLINE OF HAZARD ZONE
H 0m) I
45 IN.
(1.1)
40 IN.
FRONT BACK OF ZONE
OF ZONE I CENTERLINE OF
28 IN. HAZARD ZONE
ZONE
FIGURE 94
557537
Table 2 . Overlapping System Piping Limitations
Total Max. 3/8 in. Max. Maximum
System Flow Pipe No. of Elevation Cartridge
Size Numbers Length Elbows Rise Size
3 Gallon 6 75 ft 25 loft LT-30-R
(11.4L) (22.9m) (3.1 m)
6 Gallon 12 75 ft 25 lOft Double
(22.7 L) (22.9 m) (3.1 m) Tank/
Man ifolded LT-A-1 01-
30*
9 Gallon 18 75 ft 25 lOft Double
(34.1 L) (22.9 m) (3.1 m) Tank!
LT-A-101-
30*
50 ft (15.2 m) maximum pipe from first to last nozzle.
50 ft (15.2 m) maximum pipe after the split on a split system.
*Use with regulated actuator only.
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations -
Group Protection
1. For each group of protected appliances under a common
hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right to
left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 1.1.5 in.
P. (29.2 cm) inside the outside edge of the cooking hazard of
each end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must
be located between the two end nozzles at a maximum spac-
ing of 25.5 in. (64.8 cm). See Figures 95 and 96.
25.5 IN. (64.8 cm) MAXIMUM
SPACING(S) BETWEEN
OVERLAPPING NOZZLES
FULL HOOD CONTINUOUS APPLIANCE PROTECTION
0. FIGURE 95
007538
b. 25.5 IN. (64.8 cm) 11.5 IN. (29.2 cm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
I 11.5 IN. -ø-.J
P I I I 1245 245 -1 k - -ø.f k 0 I .ø- 11.5 IN.
(29.2 cm) 245 260 245 25.5 IN. (29.2 cm)
01 MAXIMUM (64.8 cm) MAXIMUM
FROM
EDGE OF .
ft MAXIMUM .\\ / .
FROM
. EDGE OF
COOKING / COOKING
HAZARD EDGE OF HAZARD
COOKING
HAZARD
GROUP APPLIANCE PROTECTION
NOTE: On group appliance protection, start and end of EACH zone
group must be protected with a 245 nozzle.
4' FIGURE 96
001720
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-46
REV. 6 7-1-09
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) 4. On protected appliances, all hazard surfaces located in a
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations - group must be within 40-45 in. (1-1.1 m) from the nozzle(s).
Group Protection (Continued) Once that dimension is exceeded, a new group must be start-
When obstructions are located adjacent to appliance(s) pro- ed. See Figure 99.
tected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping appliance noz- Note: The supply pipe feeding nozzle groups is to be at the
zie spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to the same elevation. Adjust height for each group only by varying
obstruction. See Figure 97. lengths of nozzle drops.
25.5 IN. 125.5 IN 'I 25.5 IN. 25.5 IN. 11.5 IN. (29.2 Cm)
11.5 IN. (64.8 Cm) (64.8 cm) (64.8 cm )I (64.8 cm) MAXIMUM
(29---...,_- ..11.5IN. /'\ MAX. m) .._ _______
245 260 260 260 245
END OF
T I
NOZZLES
ZZLES
ZONE
L i
..OUTSIDE I
EDGE OF I 40 IN. i NO
COOKING 45 IN.
ki END OF 401N. I I 4
(iBm) 451N. I I HAZARD (1.1 m) I (1.0 m) I I
ZONE
m)
NOTE: On continuous appliance protection, start and end with 245 1 -
t I' HAZARD AREA IPI OBSTRUCTION
nozzles and 260 nozzle(s) in the middle.
FIGURE 97 GROUP'A'_. GROUPB"__ø1 001715
NOTE: On group appliance protection, start and end of EACH zone When an appliance requires dedicated protection with a pro- group must be protected with a 245 nozzle. tected area intended for overlapping appliance nozzle protec-
tion-the group protection option will be required for appliances FIGURE 99
on either side of the appliances using dedicated protection. .
007539
Group protection using overlapping appliance nozzles must Detection Requirements For Overlapping Appliance begin with the protected appliance(s) adjacent to the dedicat- Protection ed appliance protected. An overlapping appliance nozzle(s)
must be positioned within 11.5 in. (29.2 cm) of the edge(s) of When utilizing overlapping appliance protection, fusible link detec-
the appliance hazard surface area(s) adjacent to the dedicat- tors must be installed on a maximum of 2 ft (0.61 m) centers,
ed nozzle protection. See Figure 98. starting with detectors located in (under) the duct opening(s).
Starting from the detector under the duct opening, add detectors
fl
on 2 ft (0.61 m) maximum spacing until the complete length of the
plenum area is covered, from one end to the other. The location of
L
EDGE OF COOKING the last detector on each end of the plenum must not exceed HAZARD 2 ft (0.61 m) from end of plenum.
I
/ \ Note: Standard detector placement can also be utilized when
11.5 IN. +25.5 IN.+ + .5 IN.+ 25.5 IN. + using overlapping protection. However, the overlapping detector _______ 1(64.8 cm) (64.8 cm) l 11.5 IN. option cannot be used when utilizing standard R-102 protection. (29.2 cm)-, (64.8 cm)l
MAX. 1'MAX.'i MAX. MAX. '1 ' (29.2 cm) o. Refer to Pages 4-57 and 4-58 for detector placement.
MAX
HAZARD
MAXIMUM OF
EDGE__, 11.5 11.5 IN. (29.2 cm) , EDGE -
COOKING 1 COOKING
I I HAZARD
DEDICATED NOZZLE
APPLIANCE
NOTE: On group appliance protection, start and end of EACH zone
0. group must be protected with a 245 nozzle. FIGURE 98
001756
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 U LC EX3470 Page 4-47
7-1-09 REV. 5
0 TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS
Once the hazard analysis is completed and the total nozzle flow
numbers are established, the quantity and size of agent tanks and
cartridges needed to supply the nozzles with the proper volumes
of agent at the proper flow rates can be determined. For cartridges
used in the regulated release mechanism, flow capacities, tank
quantities and sizes, and regulated release cartridge options are
given in the table below.
Total Quantity and
Flow Size of
Numbers* Tank(s)
1 - 5 (1) 1.5 Gallon
6-11 (1) 3.0 Gallon
11-16 (1) 1.5 Gallon
3.0 Gallon
16 -22 3.0 Gallon
16-22 (2)3.oGallon
(Manifold)
o-22-33 3.0 Gallon
When one or more regulated actuators are used, the following
tank and cartridge combinations apply for each regulated actuator:
Regulated Actuator
Cartridge
LT-20-R or 101 -10
LT-30-R or 101-20
LT-A-101-30 or 101-30** or
double tank
LT-A-101-30 or 10130** or
double tank
LT-A-101-30 or Double
LT-A-101-30 or Double
* For exceptions to maximum flow numbers, see Distribution Piping Requirements for 1.5 gallon
and 3.0 gallon systems in this Section.
The 101-30 cartridge can not be used when (2) two 3.0 gallon tanks are manifolded together.
For higher total flow numbers (23 to 110), multiple cartridges and
regulated actuators are required as shown in the System Selection
Guide in Section IX - Appendix.
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation and
expellant gas lines between the regulated release mechanism reg-
ulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each agent tank.
These limitations should be considered when selecting the com-
ponent mounting locations.
The actuation gas line is the length of pipe and/or hose that is run
from either the AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly or the
Remote Release Assembly that directs high pressure from the
cartridge in the release to actuate one or more additional
Regulated Actuator Assemblies. The actuation gas line can consist
of 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, stainless steel, or
galvanized steel pipe and fittings, and/or factory supplied stainless
steel braided actuation hose.
The expellant gas line is the length of pipe that is run from the
regulator in either the AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly or
a Regulated Actuator Assembly that directs regulated pressure to
the agent storage tanks to pressurize the tank and discharge the
agent. The expellant gas line shall consist of 1/4 in. Schedule 40
black iron, chrome-plated, stainless steel, or galvanized steel pipe
and fittings.
Actuation Gas Line - 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum
* 8 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators.
Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva-
nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated
release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected
within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line
from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actuator
assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft (6 rn) when using an
LT-20-R, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-10 or a
101-20 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 100.
Regulated Release
Cartridge Options
Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide
LT-20-R 101-10
LT-30-R 101-20
Double 101-30
Double 10130**
Double -
Double -
Regulated Actuator
Tank(s)
(1) 1.5 Gallon
(1) 3.0 Gallon
•
(1) 1.5 Gallon and
(1) 3.0 Gallon
(2) 3.0 Gallon
(2) 3.0 Gallon (Manifold)
P. (3) 3.0 Gallon
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
EXPELLANT GAS LINES
NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION
GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R,
LT-30-R, 101-10 OR 101-20 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 20 FT. (6 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS 9
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
*ANSUL AUTOMAN"
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 100
S
9 TEES MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM OF 5 AGENTTANK REGULATED
ACTUATORS
1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE
MAXIMUM OF 5
REGULATED ACTUATORS
20 ELBOWS
MAXIMUM
ri
ftftl
REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS
(PART NO. 433485) 5 MAXIMUM
' CHECK VALVE
MAXIMUM OF
._. 5 REMOTE
RELEASE
MECHANISMS
I ii I (PART NO.
433485)OR
.) ONE (1)
REGULATED
RELEASE (PART
NO. 429853)
FIGURE 102
000301
LJJf REGULATED - REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY jJJ ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT
GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED *ANSUL AUTOMAN" IN COMBINED TOTALS REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 101
000262
SAFETY EXPELLANT RELIEF VALVE 114 IN. ACTUATION LINE— GAS LINE 100 FT (30.5 m) MAXIMUM
RMINUMI iUII!IiIL!iili•IIINil
REGULATED ACTUATOR
WITH TANK
1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE OPTIONS
SAFETY
RELIEF VALVE
I 42 IN. (107 cm) r' MAX. HOSE
LENGTH (TYP.)
0.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
U UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-48
REV. 6 7-1-09
ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
(Continued)
Actuation Gas Line —6 to 8* Tanks Maximum (Continued)
If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release
assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined
length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not
exceed 30 ft (9 m) when using a "double-tank" nitrogen car-
tridge or a LT-A-1 01-30 nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 carbon
11. dioxide cartridge. See Figure 101.
A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 900
elbow.
Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15* Tanks Maximum
* 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators.
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva-
nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
Note: Stainless steel hose and fittings can also be used. See
Component Section for detailed information.
ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A DOUBLE TANK" CARTRIDGE
OR A 101-30 CARTRIDGE OR A LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH-3D FT (9 m)
MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS —9
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
'It
II I
I II I
I ill I-)
REGULATED ACTUATOR
WITH TANK
NOTE: WHEN MULTIPLE RELEASE ASSEMBLIES ARE UTILIZED, A 114 IN. CHECK VALVE,
PART NO. 25627, WILL BE REQUIRED AFTER EACH REGULATED RELEASE.
The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101 remote
mechanical release to each R-102 regulated actuator assem-
bly. The total length of the actuation gas line from the remote
mechanical release to the regulated actuator assemblies must
not exceed 100 ft (30.5 m).
A combined total of 20 elbows and 9 tees may be used
in these lines. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. See
0. Figure 102.
Use only a 101 -10 carbon dioxide cartridge in the 101 remote
mechanical release.
A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the
actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after actuation.
P. Actuation Gas Line - Using 1/4 in. Stainless Steel Hose
15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators.
Maximum total length of hose cannot exceed 17.5 ft (5.3 m).
Note: A combination of 1/4 in. stainless steel braided hose
and 1/4 in. NPT pipe can be used as long as the total com-
bined actuation gas line length does not exceed 17.5 ft
(5.3 m). Stainless steel braided hose cannot be used for
expellant gas lines. See Figure 102 for additional details.
Maximum of 5 regulated actuators allowed
Actuated with remote release (Part No. 433485) or Regulated
Release Assembly (Part No. 429853)
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-49
7-1-09 REV. 5
ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
(Continued)
Expellant Gas Line
1. The expellant gas line is installed from the regulated release
mechanism in double, three, and multiple-tank systems, and
from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple-tank sys-
tems. The expellant gas line is the piping and/or hose between
the regulator and the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket assembly.
The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated
release mechanism or each regulated actuator assembly
must not exceed 30 ft (9 m) when using a "double-tank" car-
tridge, an LT-A-101-30 Cartridge, or a 101-30 Cartridge. See
Figures 103 and 104.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT (9 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9
4. If three 3.0 gallon tanks are connected to the regulator in
either a regulated release or regulated actuator assembly,
only factory supplied expellant gas hose assemblies will be
utilized. Refer to Distribution Piping Requirements - 9.0
Gallon System, page 4-55 for additional design requirements.
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been deter-
mined, it is then necessary to determine the piping configurations
between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle. This section
contains the guidelines and limitations for designing the distribu-
tion piping so that the liquid agent will discharge from the nozzles
at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also be referred to
when selecting the mounting location for the regulated release
mechanism and agent tank.
S
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT (9 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9
General Piping Requirements
All R-1 02 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need for
critical lengths and balancing is minimized.
Two 450 elbows count as one 900 elbow.
Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and
all fittings within the branch line itself.
The minimum piping length of Schedule 40, 3/8 in. pipe from
the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or wok
must be 6 ft (1.8 m).
Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center of
fitting. See Figure 105.
- CENTER TO CENTER
FIGURE 103
000776 (p
ANSUL AUTOMAN"
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 104
000777
FIGURE 105
000778
All distribution piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40 black iron,
chrome-plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped gal-
vanized pipe on the distribution piping.
All threaded connections located in and above the protected
area must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to
male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the
end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the
agent distribution.
Before installing blow-off caps on nozzles, apply a small
amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the
opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the
exterior of the blow-off cap. This will help keep cooking grease
from building up on the cap.
Tees used in the distribution piping can be used as thru tees,
side outlet tees, or bull tees.
A combined total of nine fittings may be Used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 900
elbow.
If two tanks are connected to the regulated release assembly
in a multiple-tank system arrangement, the total combined
length of the actuation and expellant gas lines must not
exceed 30 It (9 m) when using a "double-tank" nitrogen car-
tridge, an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-30 carbon
dioxide cartridge. See Figure 101.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-50
REV. 5 7-1-09
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Supply and Branch Line Identification SUPPLY LINE
The R-102 distribution piping network is broken down intc four The Supply Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from
specific pipe runs: the Supply Line, the Duct Branch Line, the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct, appli-
the Plenum Branch Line, and the Appliance Branch Line. See ance, or plenum branch line). This includes all supply line fittings
Figure 106. except for the tees or elbows leading to the branch lines. See
DUCT Figures 106 and 107.
BRANCH LINE
UA
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
SUPPLY
LINE
PLENUM APPLIANCE
BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE
NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY.
THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION.
FIGURE 106
000779
NOTE: THESE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED.
END OF
SUPPLY.LINE
DOF
SUPPLY LINE
SUPPLY (NOZZLES FOR
LINE TEE PLENUM
PROTECTION)
S
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
BFANCH LINE CANNOT
SThRT AHEAD OF A
SUPPLY LINE TEE
(NOZZLES FOR
\ PLENUM
PROTECTION)
BRANCH LINE CANNOT
START AHEAD OF A
SUPPLY LINE TEE
FIGURE 107
000780
S
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-51
7-1-09 REV. 5 .DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued)
NOTICE
Branch lines cannot start ahead of a supply line
tee.
DUCT BRANCH LINE
The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs
from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all branch
line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch line.
See Figures 107 and 108.
DUCT BRANCH LINE
(ELBOW INCLUDED)
q'• t
.. $ DUCT BRANCH LINE
(TEE INCLUDED)
V 1 A
Li DUCT BRANCH LINE
(TEES INCLUDED)
I
FIGURE 108 000781
0
PLENUM BRANCH LINE
The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which
runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes all
branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the
branch line. See Figures 106 and 109.
--4
PLENUM BRANCH LINE _. I (TEE INCLUDED)
I PLENUM BRANCH LINE
(TEE INCLUDED)
FIGURE 109 000782
APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE
The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which
runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This includes
all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the
branch line. See Figures 107 and 110.
- - -
I-- -
APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES
(TEES INCLUDED)
FIGURE 110 000783
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-52
REV. 4 7-1-09
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements - 1.5 Gallon System
DUCT, PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION
This option allows for duct protection, plenum protection,
appliance protection, or any combination. However, only one
(1) duct nozzle may be used, either a 1W or a 2W, nozzle.
All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in.
Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel.
Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow numbers.*
The pipe length between the start of the first branch line and
the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft (2.4 m).
When the supply line is split, the combined length of both
legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to start of last
branch line) must not exceed 8 ft (2.4 m). See Figure 111.
The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 22 ft P.
(6.7 m). See Figure 112.
The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded:
START OF LAST
BRANCH LINE
START OF FIRST
BRANCH LINE
SUPPLY AN-
LINE TEE TOTAL LENGTH
MUST NOT
EXCEED 8 FT
1-11 (2.4 m)
START OF LAST
BRANCH LINE
START OF FIRST
BRANCH LINE
FIGURE 111
000784
1W NOZZLE
d 1N NOZZLE
IN NOZZLE
(BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST
NOT EXCEED 22 FT. (6.7 m)
FIGURE 112
000785
Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Supply Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Pipe Size 1 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 40 ft 6 ft 4 ft loft
(12.2m) (1.8 m) (1.2m) (3m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft 4 ft 2 ft 2 ft
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m) (0.6 m)
Maximum 900 Elbow 9 4 4 6
Maximum Tees 1 1 2 3
Maximum Flow Numbers 5* 2 2 3
Exceptions:
I. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when a duct branch line is the last branch line on the piping network and no 1 nozzles are used to protect woks or griddles.
Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when six (6) 1 N nozzles are used and none of the nozzles are used to protect woks, griddles, ranges, and salamanders.
- NOTE: Only five (5) flow numbers are allowed if a 1 N nozzle is used for wok, griddle, range, or salamander protection. -
Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when only two (2) 3N nozzles are used.
0
[1
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-53
7-1-09 REV. 4
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements - 3.0 Gallon System
The maximum length between the start of the first branch line
and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft
(7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of
both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch
line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft
(7.3 m). See Figure 113.
The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft
(10.9 m). See Figure 113.
Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in.
supply line.
A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line.
The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded:
SUPPLY
TEE (
I COMBINED LENGTH OF
BOTH LEGS OF SUPPLY
LINE MUST NOT
EXCEED 24 FT (7.3 ml
2W NOZZLE
000266
3 BRANCH LINES
IN NOZZLE
1 NOZZLE
r-i-I
230 NOZZLE
245
COMBINED LENGTH MUST
NO
j4000
1/2N NOZZLE
(BRANCH LINE IN BOLD)
000502
NOT EXCEED 36 FT (10.9 m)
FIGURE 113
Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 40 ft 8 ft 4 ft 12 ft
(12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft 4 ft 2 ft 2 ft
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m) (0.6 m)
Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4
Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4
Numbers
*Exceptions:
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection only.
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using Only Iwo-flow appliance nozzles.
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three-flow appliance nozzles.
Special Instructions:
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed when four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 66 on Page 4-32. The discharge piping must
be as shown in Figure 67 on Page 4-32.
For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle, one )1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle,
one (1) IN plenum nozzle, and four (4) Iwo-flow appliance nozzles. Contact ANSUL Applications Engineering Department for additional information.
0
2W
ZLE
ZZLE
S
2 FLOW APPLIANCE NOZZLE
(BRANCH LINES IN BOLD)
COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT (10.9 m)
FIGURE 114
000267
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-54
REV. 5 7-1-09
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements - 6.0 Gallon Manifolded
System
As an option to piping two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks separately, two (2)
3.0 gallon tanks can be manifolded together to share a common
agent distribution line. Only (2) 3.0 gallon tanks connected to the
same regulator can be manifolded. The following requirements
must be met when manifolding:
All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40.
See Figure 115 for tank connections.
The length of supply line piping between the start of the first
branch line and the start of the last branch line must not
exceed 24 ft (7.3 m). See Figure 94. When the supply line is
split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from
the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch
line) must not exceed 24 ft (7.3 m).
The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft
(10.9 m). See Figure 114.
A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed.
The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded.
S
LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT.
(7.3 m) FROM START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE
TO START OF LAST BRANCH LINE
0>
START OF LAST
1
BRANCH LINE
Requirements
Pipe Size.
Maximum Length
Maximum Rise
Maximum 900
Elbows
Maximum Tees
Maximum Flow
Numbers
Supply Line
3/8 in.
32 ft
(9.7 m)
6 f
(1.8m)
8
2
22
Duct
Branch Line:
3/8 in.
8 I
(2.4 m)
4 f
(1.2 m)
4
2
4
Plenum
Branch Line
3/8 in.
4 f
(1.2 m)
2 f
(0.6m)
4
2
2
Appliance
Branch Line
3/8 in.
12ft
(3.7m)
2 f
(0.6 m)
6
4
4
S
OR
1.5 - DOUBLE TANK
NITROGEN GALLON N
TANK
__
CARTRIDGE OR
101-30 CO2
CARTRIDGE
(LT-A-101-30 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY OR CARTRIDGE - REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED
TANK/ENCLOSURE . ACTUATOR ONLY)
ASSEMBLY
TANKF
3.OGALLON 3.0 GALLON
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-55
7-1-09 REV.4
C DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements - 6.0 Gallon Manifolded
System (Continued)
This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks are
connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from a
single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the regu-
lated release assembly. See Figure 115. Note: A tank mounting
bracket can be utilized instead of the tank/enclosure assembly.
,,,See Figure 117.
3/8 IN.
3/8 IN. 3/8 IN. BRANCH
SUPPLY SUPPLY /
USE HOSE/ SEE
GROMMET NOTE
PACKAGE \
(PART NO. \ 3/8 IN BRANCH
7ASSEMBLY-
418511) ' BURST DISC SEE NOTE NO.4
REMOVE
BURST DISC —
SEE NOTE NO, 3
GALLON GALLON
TANK TANK DOUBLE TANK
NITROGEN
CARTRIDGE OR
N(LTA10130 CARTRIDGE-.
008127 REGULATED 3.0 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ACTUATOR ONLY) ASSEMBLY OR 3.0 GALLON REGULATED
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
TANK/ENCLOSURE
ASSEMBLY
NOTE 1: THE PIPE CONNECTION FROM TANK CENTER TO TANK
CENTER CANNOT EXCEED 8-1/2 IN. (21.5 cm). ALSO, OEM
RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY CAN BE UTILIZED WHEN
MANIFOLDING 3.0 GALLON TANK.
NOTE 2: ONLY 3 GALLON TANKS CAN BE MANIFOLDED.
NOTE 3: THE BURST DISC THAT IS PART OF THE TANK
ADAPTOR/BURST DISC ASSEMBLY MUST BE REMOVED
AND MODIFIED. SEPARATE THE ALUMINUM DISC
MATERIAL FROM THE PLASTIC GASKET. DISCARD THE
ALUMINUM DISC MATERIAL AND REINSTALL THE
PLASTIC GASKET BACK INTO THE TANK
ADAPTOR/BURST DISC ASSEMBLY.
NOTE 4: THE IN-LINE BURST DISC ASSEMBLY, PART NO. 416790,
IS TO BE MOUNTED AS CLOSE TO THE TANK OUTLET AS
POSSIBLE. AFTER SYSTEM DISCHARGE, THE ASSEMBLY
MUST BE DISASSEMBLED AND A NEW BURST DISC
INSTALLED.
FIGURE 115
Distribution Piping Requirements —With Independent Pipe
Runs
Independent pipe runs can also be used with the regulated
release assembly and the tank/enclosure assembly or tank mount-
ing brackets. See Figure 116. When manifolding is not used, each
of the two (2) 3 gallon tanks utilize the piping limitations of a single
tank system.
GROMMET
PACKAGE
(PART NO. Njl lii. 418511) III
FIGURE 116
- 000786
Note: If an expellant gas hose is to be used for a second tank in
an adjacent tank enclosure or tank bracket assembly, the second
tank will need to be installed on the left side of the ANSUL
AUTOMAN Regulated Release, with the outlets a maximum of 8
1/2 in. (21.6 cm) from center to center, similar to the manifolded
system in Figure 115. Otherwise, the second tank will require 1/4
in. NPT pipe instead of expellant gas hose.
TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN
ASSEMBLY PART NO. RELEASE ASSEMBLY,. CARTRIDGE OR
430324 (INCLUDES (2) OR GALLON LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE
HOSES AND (2) REGULATED ACTUATOR (REGULATED ACTUATOR
GROMMETS) ASSEMBLY ONLY)
NOTE: WHEN THREE (3) 3.0 GALLON TANKS ARE CONNECTED TO ONE (1)
AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY, NO ADDITIONAL
REGULATED ACTUATOR(S) ASSEMBLIES CAN BE USED.
FIGURE 117
008126
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-56
REV.4 7-1-09
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Distribution Piping Requirements - 9.0 Gallon System
This optional configuration consists only of three 3-gallon tanks, all
pressurized from a single double-tank nitrogen cartridge with
P. expellant gas hoses connected as shown in Figure 117. Tanks No.
1 and No. 2 must be connected directly to the regulator with sepa-
rate expellant gas hoses and Tank No. 3 must be connected to
Tank No. 2 with a third expellant gas hose as shown in Figure 117.
Each tank must be connected to an independent distribution pip-
ing network as shown in Figure 117. Distribution piping require-
ments for each network must be as follows:
The maximum length between the start of the first branch line
and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft
(7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of
both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch
line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft
(7.3 m). See Figure 113.
The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft
(10.9 m). See Figure 113.
Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in.
supply line.
A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line.
When using this 9.0 gallon system configuration, no man!-
folding of distribution piping is allowed.
When an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release is utilized in
this configuration, additional regulator actuators cannot be
used.
Only 3 gallon tanks can be utilized in this configuration.
The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded
for each 3 gallon tank:
Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
Maximum Length 40 ft 8 ft 4 ft 12 It
(12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft 4 ft 2 ft 2 ft
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m) (0.6 m)
Maximum 900 9 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4
Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4
Numbers
*Exceptions.
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection ONLY.
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles.
Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three-flow appliance nozzles.
Special Instructions:
0. 1. When four (4) Dean Industries GTt Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 66 on Page 4-32, the discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 67 on
Page 4-32.
2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle, one (1)1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle,
one (1) 1 plenum nozzle, and four (4) two-flow appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications Engineering Department for additional information.
0
FIGURE 118
000271
NOTICE
When gas appliances are used and the flue
gases from the burner are exhausted into the
duct, the detector must be kept out of the air
stream of these exhaust gases. These gases
can be very hot and could actuate the system
unnecessarily.
Duct openings that are long and narrow or large
enough to require multiple duct nozzles may
require additional detectors.
ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of the
exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the pre-
cipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the duct,
just above the precipitator. See Figure 119.
When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make
certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator.
Note: On secondary filtration units utilizing multiple filter
stages/media, contact Ansul Technical Services for instructions.
FIGURE 119
000268
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-57
7-1-09 REV. 2
DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Once the fire suppression system design has been determined, a
detection system design must be completed. This section contains
guidelines and limitations for detection system installation.
Detector Identification
The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other by
their location in the detection system.
The Terminal Detector (Part No. 417368) is the last in a series
of detectors, or the only detector used in a single-detector sys-
tem. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at
which the wire rope ends, or "terminates."
A Series Detector (Part No. 417369) is any detector located in-
line between the regulated release mechanism and the termi-
nal detector.
Detector/Pulley Elbow/Conduit Off-Set Design Limitations
Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per sys-
tem must be within the approved system guidelines. The fol-
lowing requirements must not be exceeded:
Maximum Maximum Maximum
Number of Number of Length of 1/2
Detectors Elbows in. Conduit
per System per System per System
Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft (45.7 m)
Detector
(Without . Off-Set Conduit
Scissors Style 15 16 150 ft (45.7 m)
Detector (With
Off-Set Conduit
If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five 101
Remote Releases (Part No. 433485) can be used for system
actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use of a maxi-
mum of 15 "scissor" style detectors (14 series and 1 terminal)
for a total of 75 detectors if needed.
Detector Placement Requirements
EXHAUST DUCTS
Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed in the
duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking vapors, or at
a maximum of 20 ft (6.1 m) into the duct opening. See Figure 118.
-
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-58
REV. 2 7-1-09
Detector Replacement Requirements (Continued)
COOKING APPLIANCES
If the cooking appliance is located under an exhaust duct where a
detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to utilize
another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the detector
is not more than 12 in. (30 cm) into the duct and the appliance has
no larger cooking surface than 48 in. x 48 in. (121.9 cm x 129.1
cm). See Figure 120.
Note: If two (2) appliances are located under a duct opening
where a detector has been mounted and both appliances togeth-
er do not exceed a cooking surface of 48 in. x 48 in. (121.9 cm x
121.9 cm) and the detector is located above both the protected
appliances, it is not necessary to utilize an additional detector pro-
vided the duct detector is not more than 12 in. (30.5 cm) into the
duct opening.
APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE
REQUIRES COVERED BY REQUIRES
SEPARATE DETECTOR SEPARATE
DETECTOR UNDER DUCT DETECTOR
FIGURE 120
000269
Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface not
exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (122 x 122 cm) can be protected by a min-
imum of one detector. Cooking appliances with a continuous cook-
ing surface exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. must be protected by at least
one detector per 48 in. x 48 in. cooking area. Detectors used for
cooking appliances must be located above the protected appli-
ance toward the exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector
should be located in the air stream of the appliance to enhance
system response time.
Note: For overlapping detector coverage, see Page 4-45 for
design requirements.
Detection Line Requirements
CONDUIT
Rigid conduit or 1/2 inch EMT thin-wall conduit may be used.
Standard steel conduit fittings (compression type are recommend-
ed) must be employed to properly install the detection system. All
conduit or pipe must be firmly supported. When using pipe, make
certain that all ends are carefully reamed, deburred and blown
clear of chips and scale before assembly.
NOTICE fl The conduit offset can be used at the top or bot-
tom of the regulated release to change direction
of the conduit. The conduit offset cannot be
used with pulley tees. All other changes in direc-
tion must be made by using ANSUL approved
pulley elbows, Part No. 423254 or 415670. See
Figure 121.
FIGURE 121
000270
Fusible Link Selection
When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each
detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature rat-
ing. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum regis-
tering thermometer, Part No. 15240, temperature tape or any other
accurate thermometer.
ANSULe
II .
I'° I TEMPERATURE RATING
STAMPED ON FUSIBLE fri j LINK BODY
__ 000170
K STYLE 000171 ML STYLE
FIGURE 122
Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s)
according to the temperature condition. Two styles are available.
See Figure 122. See Component Section for detailed temperature
ratings.
S
Metal Stamped Style - Part No. 4835 or 54011
Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped remote
manual pull station are:
Description Part No.
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly* 54011
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 4835
Pulley Elbow 423250
Pulley Elbow 415670
Pulley Tee 427929
Assembly includes parts listed below:
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-59
7-1-09 REV. 2
0 MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS
A remote manual pull station allows the R-102 system to be man-
ually operated at some point distant from the regulated release
assembly. The pull station should be installed at a height of 42-48
in. (107-122 cm), in accordance with the requirements of the
American Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority having Jurisdic-
tion. and located in the path of egress. The pull station is the only
source of manual actuation of the regulated release assembly.
The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station with-
in a system must not exceed 150 ft (46 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per pull 1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft. (15 m) 15821
station is 20. Oval Press-To-Crimp Sleeves 4596
One pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is allowed per cable system. Glass Break Rod (1) 4834
The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a pull station
is 150 ft (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per
side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN,
the 150 ft (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley
elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must
be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each
side.
Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN
and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for
use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 123 for three
different examples. (Note: Both must be gas valves or both must
be pull stations. Mixing is not allowed.)
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS
An ANSUL or ANSUL approved mechanical gas shut-off valve
system can be attached to the R-102 system. The system works
both mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder
located inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation of
the fire suppression system, a pneumatically-operated air cylinder
assembly will mechanically close the gas shut-off valve.
The total length of the cable for each mechanical gas valve must
not exceed 150 ft (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows
that may be used is 20 for each valve.
One pulley tee (Part No. 427929) is allowed per cable system.
The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a gas valve is
150 ft (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side
of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the
150 ft (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley elbows are
placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must be deducted
from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side.
Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN
and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for
use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 123 for three
different examples.
Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas Shut-
off Valve are:
TEE CLOSE TO AUTOMAN (EXAMPLE)
PULLEY TEE
S12
(305 mm)
0 R
GAS VALVE OR AUTOMANGAS VALVE OR
MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL
149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS MAXIMUM
PER EACH SIDE OF TEE
TEE CLOSE TO GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) Description Part No.
Gas Valve/Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55598 [1 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55601 12 IN. 12 IN
I I Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55604
(tu~LLEY
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/2 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55607
TEE Gas Valve/Actuator 2 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55610
GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR Gas Valve/Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25937 MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL Gas Valve/Actuator 3 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25938 AUTOMAN Pulley Elbow 423250 149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS BETWEEN
AUTOMAN AND TEE Pulley Elbow 415670
Pulley Tee 427929
1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 15821 or
TEE HALFWAY BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) 50 ft (15 m) or 500 ft (152 m) roll 79653 75 FT (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS Oval Press-To-Crimp Sleeve 4596
Stop Sleeve (2) 26317
75 FT (22.9 ml AND 75 FT (22.9 m) AND *Assembly includes parts listed below:
tO PULLEY ELBOWS 10 PULLEY ELBOWS Air Cylinder Assembly 15733
PULLEYTEE Air Cylinder 15521 6 Tubing Assembly 15529
AUTOMAN GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR Copper Tubing, 1/8 in. 15525
MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL Male Elbow
Male Connector
15523
15522 FIGURE 123
004907 Machine Screw (2) 15421
Hex Nut (2) 15527
Lockwasher (2) 4141
Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-60
REV. 2 7-1-09
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be mount-
ed in any position. Pipe threads are type NPT. Ambient operating
temperature range of all valves is 32 OF to 120 OF (0 "C to 49 °C).
The valves are not weatherproof and must be located indoors in
areas approved by the "authority having jurisdiction."
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS
A UL Listed electrically-operated gas shut-off valve can be
attached to the R-102 system to provide an electrical means of
shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric gas
shut-off valve is used in the system it must be attached with both
an electric (snap-action) switch and a manual reset relay. For more
information on the types of electric (snap-action) switches, refer to
the Electrical Switch, Field Installation section. The manual reset
relay is reviewed in this section.
All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED
ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having
jurisdiction.
The following is a brief explanation of how the R-102 system oper-
ates with an Electric Gas Shut-off Valve attached:
With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the nor-
mally closed contacts in the snap-action switch allow current to
flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized, nor-
mally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the solenoid
in the gas valve to be energized.
Once the R-102 system is activated, the normally closed contacts
in the snap-action switch will open, de-energizing the reset relay.
This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which will cause the
gas valve to become de-energized and close.
The system must be re-armed and the "push to reset" button on
the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve.
It is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power
interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the sys-
tem was not fired.
In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power failure
has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas shut-off
valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condition. For
resetting, refer to the "Recharge and Resetting Procedures"
section in this manual.
Approvals
ANSUL gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and approved
for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to the Gas and
Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under
"Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5" or consult Ansul
Incorporated, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542.
If other gas valves are used, they shall be "UL listed electrically-
operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of appro-
priate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC/60 Hz." The infor-
mation on temperature and type of gas that the valves are suitable
for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated
Valves Guide No. 440 A5."
The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that needs
to be energized to remain open.
Note: For electrical wiring diagrams, see Installation Section,
Pages 5-19.1 through 5-19.3.
Parts that may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut-off
Valve are:
Description Part No.
Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT* 13707
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT* 13708
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/2 in. NPT" 13709
Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT* 13710
Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT* 17643
Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 14702
Valves are normally closed when de-energized.
ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS
The Alarm Initiating Switch can be field mounted within the
ANSUL AUTOMAN release. The switch must be used to close a
supervised alarm circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when
the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the
fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen
area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components
P. along with a mounting instruction sheet. See Page 5-19 for wiring
information.
The switch is rated 50 mA, 28VDC.
Part No. Description
428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS
Note: Electrical connections shall not be made in the ANSUL
AUTOMAN.
The electric (snap-action) switches for the R-102 system are spe-
cially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The switches
are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors,
lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices, and
other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on
when the fire suppression system is actuated. (See Figures
110 through 112 in Installation Section for reference).
Contractors shall supply "UL listed, enclosed industrial control
equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of the
cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC/60 Hz or 24 VAC/60 Hz."
All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED
ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having
jurisdiction.
Electric (Snap-Action) Switches that may be field installed are:
Part No. Description
423878 One Switch Kit
423879 Two Switch Kit
423880 Three Switch Kit
423881 Four Switch Kit
Each switch has a set of single-pole, double throw contacts rated
at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC.
Note: A relay must be supplied by others if the equipment load
exceeds the rated capacity of the switch.
Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance
with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of the
authority having jurisdiction.
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-61
7-1-09 REV. 0
0 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system
shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, so that the
actuation of the extinguishing system will sound the fire alarm as
well as provide the extinguishing function of the system.
If supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or
electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt audi-
ble or visual indication of trouble and shall be distinctive from
alarms or indicators indicating operation or hazardous conditions
as specified in NFPA 17A.
0
SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 4-62
REV. 0 7-1-09
NOTES:
--9
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-1
7-1-09 REV. 7
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The installation information listed in this section deals with the limi-
tations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those indi-
viduals responsible for the installation of the R-102 system must
be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R-102 train- ,
ing program.
Before attempting any installation, the entire system design must
have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, Tank
Quantity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution Piping,
and Detection System Requirements and an installation sketch
should be completed.
If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid surface
using appropriate fasteners.
Fill tanks per instructions listed in Steps 3 and 4 on
Page 5-2-1.
Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten into
1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the tank/enclosure
assembly. Also install hose to tank adaptor in regulated
release and wrench tighten. See Figure 116 in "Design
Section" for details of hose routing.
S
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS
For successful system performance, the regulated release assem-
bly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank-enclosure(s) or
tank-bracket assembly(ies) used must be located in areas where
the air temperature will not fall below 32 OF (0 °C) or exceed
130°F (54 °C). The R-102 system is limited to interior applications
only. Also, the components must be arranged to conform to the
actuation and expellant gas line, and the distribution piping guide-
lines noted in "System Design."
Use only an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release
assembly or OEM Release/Bracket Assembly. The regu-
lator in this assembly is specifically designed to allow a
regulated flow of expellant gas into the agent tank(s).
Absence of this regulator could cause the tank(s) to
rupture or create an improper system discharge.
Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release
Assembly, and each regulated actuator assembly required by
completing the following steps: See Figures 1, 2, and 3.
Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The
mounting locations must allow the regulated release
assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to be
within the limitation of the actuation and expellant gas line
lengths and must be able to support the weight of the
assembly(ies). When the OEM Release Assembly is
mounted inside a cabinet, clearances shall be provided for
unrestricted movement of the release assembly compo-
nents within the closed cabinet.
Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank from
enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from the
tank/adaptor assembly.
Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location using
the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners
depending on the mounting surface.
When mounting a 6-gallon manifolded system (or a 6-
gallon individual piped system) it is critical that each mount-
ing box is located as shown in Figure 3. There must be a
5/16 in. space between each box. Less than 5/16 in. will
cause interference with the covers, and more than a 5/16
in. will cause a gap between the two hose grommets which
will expose the hose to possible tampering or damage.
Remove the 7/8 in. knockout in the left side of the ANSUL
AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in. knockout in
the right side of the tank-enclosure box. Install grommets in
each (use ANSUL hose/grommet package, Part No.
418511). Remove 1/4 in. plug from back side of R-102
regular and install fixed end of secondary expellant gas
hose (included in hose/grommet package, Part No.
418511) in 1/4 in. regulator outlet and wrench tighten.
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY/REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY/DOUBLE TANK ENCLOSURE
1/2 IN.
(42 cm)
13 13/16 IN.
1 3/6 IN (35cm) I fj
—_ H (3 5 cm)
- IN.
(59.7 cm)
197/16 IN.1
cm)
- 1/2 IN.
(19 cm)
FIGURE 1
000287
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-2
REV. 5 7-1-09
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued)
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
6 IN. 7 IN. cm) (18cm)
CD
e1N.
15 IN.
.38
5.38
.62 (1.5 cm
.62 (1.5 cm)
5.75 IN.
(14.6 cm)
MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS
6 5/16 IN.
(16 cm) 1313/16IN.
LOCATION OF
GROMMETS
-
3.0 GALLON TANK BRACKET
1/ IN.
( cn)'
9 3/4 IN.
(22 cm)
713/16 IN. _..- 000499
SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE/REMOTE RELEASE
9 IN.
(22.9 cm)
FIGURE 2
0 0.
~m
-
197/16 IN. 197/16 IN.
(49 cm) I (49 cm)
II .28 IN. (.7cm)
HOLE (TYP)
FIGURE 3
000788
I1IuII[e]
Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated.
2. Mount each tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly by
completing the following steps:
Select a rigid, vertical surface for mourting the enclosure or
bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon tank is taller than
the bracket. Allow sufficient space for convenient piping and
removal).
Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure enclo-
sure or bracket to the mounting location using the four
mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depend-
ing on the mounting surface.
le i
J'i
000290
(19.1 CM)
FIGURE
El
STAINLESS STEEL TANKS
RED PAINTED STEEL TANK
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-2.1
4-1-06 REV.5
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued)
3. Fill each agent tank by completing the following steps:
a. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill opening.
Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine bursting disc is in
place and that silver side is away from tank. See Figure 5.
FIGURE 5
000291
I!!
Safety glasses should be worn during transfer opera-
tons of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant.
Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush
immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation
persists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If
taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with
water or milk and contact a physician immediately.
Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank with 1.5
(5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH
Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 6 for detailed filling
tolerances. Note: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any
foreign material from entering the tank. See Figure 6.
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 IF to
80 IF (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD
AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
agent entering gas hoses and regulator potentially
causing system malfunction.
21/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (57 mm ± 3mm)
FROM THE TOP OF THE COLLAR
FOR THE 3.0 GALLON TANK
OR
1 3/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (45 mm ± 3mm)
FROM THETOP OF THE COLLAR
FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK
1 IN. TO 11/8 IN. (25-29 mm)
FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE
FILL OPENING
FOR BOTH 3.0 GALLON AND
1.5 GALLON TANKS
0002920
FIGURE 6
000292
c. Reinstall adaptor/tube assembly to tank by tightening until
metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom of
adaptor and tank collar.
4. Place each tank into its enclosure or bracket.
0
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-2.2
REV. 1 7-1-98
NOTES:
0
./-
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-3
7-1-09 REV.3
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE
Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the design
must be determined; and the regulated release assembly, each
regulated actuator assembly and each tank-bracket assembly
should be securely mounted.
General Piping Requirements
Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva-
nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends
are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale.
Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe
tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male
thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise
around the threads, away from the pipe opening.
NOTICE
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe
opening, as this could cause possible block-
age of the gas pressure.
Thread sealant or compound must not be
used.
When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping, install
a 1/4 in. union near the tank inlet for easy disassembly later.
'Note: Expellant gas line cannot use stainless steel braided hose.
Actuation Gas Line
'Note: See Appendix for complete list and specifications when
'using rubber hose for actuation gas line.
Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism
high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through
the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the
following steps:
1. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet. Install
the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attachment as
required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is required to connect
the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 7.
S
Typical Arrangements For A One Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver
000293
Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver
1.I.51-Z•
Typical Arrangements For A Three Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver
S
000295 Typical Arrangements for Regulator Connections
TO TANK IN TO REGULATED ACTUATOR
BRACKET OR / ASSEMBLY(IES)
ENCLOSURE
(PIPE OR HOSE)
GT
000296
TO TANK IN RE 0 TANK IN REGULATED
RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY
SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS
NOTE: WHEN PIPE IS USED, ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK
IRON, HOT-TIPPED GALVANIZED, CHROME-PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL.
FIGURE 7
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-4
REV.5 7-1-09
S INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE
(Continued)
Actuation Gas Line (Continued)
Run piping or hose up through the regulated release assem-
bly enclosure knockout to the inlet on top of each. regulated
actuator assembly used within the system.
The total combined length of the actuation gas line from the
regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator assem-
blies must not exceed 20 ft (6 m) when using an LT-20-R nitro-
gen cartridge, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, a 101-10 CO2
cartridge, or a 101-20 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 8.
Note: When using stainless steel actuation line, a maximum
of 17.5 ft (5.3 m) of hose may be used.
ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R,
LT-30-R, 101-20 OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM LENGTH -20 FT (6 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9
If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release
assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined
length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not
exceed 30 ft (9.1 m). See Figure 9.
A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 900
elbow.
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES
NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS
LINE LENGTH TOTALS
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 8
ANSUL AUTOMAN 000775
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH
A"DOUBLE-TANK"OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH -30 FT (9 m),
MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS -9
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT
GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED
IN COMBINED TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
ANSULAUTOMAN REGULATED
FIGUR
000298
E 9
RELEASE ASSEMBLY
S
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-5
7-1-09 REV. 5
S INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE
(Continued)
Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly
Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly
regulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps:
The regulated release assembly is shipped with a factory-
installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, one at
the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet connects
the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which is mounted
inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed with a 1/4 in.
plug.
Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted inside
the enclosure.
TWO TANK, THREE TANK, AND MULTIPLE TANK
SYSTEMS:
If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional
tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly is being installed, the
plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. (See Figure
6 for proper connections to the regulator.)
Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back
outlet through one of the knockouts provided in the enclosure.
The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated
release assembly must not exceed 30 ft (9 m) when using a
"double-tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 cartridge.
See Figure 10.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT (9 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9
If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated release
assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total combined
length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft (9 m) when
using a 'double-tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2
cartridge. See Figure 9.
A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 900
elbow.
Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Actuator Assembly
Install expellant gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly
regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by
completing the following steps:
The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory-installed
regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets 1350 from each
other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the other
contains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank which will
be mounted within the enclosure. Connect expellant gas hose
to the agent tank that is mounted inside the enclosure.
Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet and
pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator through
the knockout provided in the enclosure to a tank-enclosure or
tank-bracket assembly. A maximum of one tank-enclosure or
tank-bracket assembly is allowed per regulated actuator
assembly.
The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the regu-
lated actuator to the tank-bracket assembly must not exceed
30 ft (9 m). See Figure 11.
A total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 900
elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 900 elbow.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH -30 FT (9 m),
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS -9
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 10
000776
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 11
000777
0
I
LI
lril
III I I
I I Ii4I
liii I
1111 I
1
1iilii1M u"ii'iru
CHECK VALVE
t
-4 MAXIMUM OF5
REMOTE
I RELEASE
. I MECHANISMS
I - (PART NO. I 433485) OR I ONE (1)
REGULATED
RELEASE (PART
NO. 429853)
FIGURE 13
000301
C
MAXIMUM OF 5
REGULATED ACTUATORS
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page5-6
REV.4 7-1-09
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE
(Continued)
Actuation Gas Line From Remote Release(s) to Regulated Actuation Gas Line - 15* Tanks Maximum - Using 1/4 in.
Actuators Stainless Steel Hose
Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the regu- Note: Not for use with expellent gas line.
lated actuators by completing the following: 1. Maximum hose length cannot exceed 17.5 ft (5.3 m). See
1. Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in the Figure 13.
remote release receiver, through the knockout provided in the 2. Maximum of 5 regulated actuators allowed. top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actuator
assembly. 3. Actuated with Remote Release (Part No. 433485) or
The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the remote Regulated Release Assembly (Part No. 429853).
release to all regulated actuators must not exceed 100 ft.
(30.5). See Figure 12. Note: Stainless steel hose and fittings
can be used. See Component Section for detailed information.
A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed in the
actuation piping. Two 450 elbows equal one 90° elbow. See
Figure 12.
A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in the
actuation piping. See Figure 12.
SAFETY RELIEF 9 TEES 20 ELBOWS VALVE MAXIMUM . MAXIMUM
1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE —100 FT (30.5 m) MAXIMUM
CHECK
EXPELLANT VALVE
GAS LINE
S
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
WITH TANK (TYP.)
AGENT TANK AND BRACKET OR
AGENT TANK IN ENCLOSURE (TYP.)
REMOTE RELEASE
MECHANISMS OR
REGULATED
RELEASES
(5 MAXIMUM)
FIGURE 12
000301
1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE OPTIONS
SAFETY 42 IN. (107 cm)
RELIEF VALVE MAX. HOSE
LENGTH (TYP.)
1/4 IN. STAINLESS
STEEL HOSE
I..J I4 •
LI I
k REGULATED ACTUATOR
WITH TANK
NOTE: WHEN MULTIPLE RELEASE ASSEMBLIES ARE UTILIZED, A 1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE, PART NO. 25627,
WILL BE REQUIRED AFTER EACH REGULATED RELEASE.
NOTE: 15 TANKS MAXIMUM REFLECTS THE UTILIZATION OF THREE (3) TANK REGULATED ACTUATORS.
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-7
7-1-09 REV. 6
S INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Before the following procedures can be completed, the piping
design must already be determined; and the actuation and expel-
lant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated actuator,
and each tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly should already
be installed.
These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and
multiple-tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and hazard
areas to be covered. U
- L-----------
S
. b.
General Piping Requirements
Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel
pipe and fittings.
NOTICE
Do not use hot-dipped galvanized iron pipe or
fittings in the agent distribution piping.
Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends
are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale.
Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in or
above the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with
pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male
thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise
around the threads, away from the pipe opening.
NOTICE
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening as
the pipe and nozzles could become plugged.
Thread sealant or compound must not be used
as it could plug the nozzles.
Distribution piping may be run independently or two agent
tanks may be manifolded together and run to the predeter-
mined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the same
cartridge may be manifolded.
NOTICE
Closely follow the piping requirements for each
size system, as detailed in the 'System Design"
section, when installing distribution piping.
Branchline tees can be used to create more than one branch
and can be installed as a thru tee, side outlet tee or bull tee.
Pipe Hanger Recommended Guidelines
Space hangers as follows:
Maximum Recommended
Pipe Size Distance Between Hangers
3/8 in. 5ft(1.5m)
Hangers should be placed between elbows when the distance
is greater than 2 ft (0.6 m).
Piping Installation
Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on the
tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to conform
to the distribution piping.
Based on the piping sketch developed in the "System Design"
section of this manual, install the supply line and position the
tees at points where branch lines must be installed. See
Figure 14.
Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each
nozzle. (Make certain all piping is securely bracketed.)
FIGURE 14
000302
Make certain all threaded connections are properly tightened.
Threaded connections located in the protected area(s) and
above the hood must be sealed with Teflon pipe tape, as a
minimum. Apply pipe tape to male threads only. Make certain
tape does not extend over the end of the thread, as this could
cause possible blockage of the agent distribution.
Pipe tape minimizes friction between bearing surfaces of the
threads when threading pipe to fittings. The resulting heat may
expand the pipe threads before the joint is properly made.
When the pipe threads cool and contract in the fitting, the joint
may become loosened causing cooking grease to migrate into
the distribution piping, and/or leakage at the fitting during a
pressure test or agent discharge.
Note: When required to provide pressure testing of pipe or a
system discharge test, it is recommended that all pipe connec-
tions utilize Teflon pipe tape.
Install the correct nozzle(s) for each hazard area as previously
designed. Some nozzles are required to be properly oriented
before they are positioned for aiming.
Aim the nozzles to a pre-determined aim point in accordance
with the instructions in the "System Design" section. Using the
Nozzle Aiming Device (Part No. 431992) will aid in the aiming
process. The device clamps to the nozzle and emits a small
laser light that reflects on the surface where it is aiming. If the
nozzle is used with Swivel Adapter (Part No. 418569), the
nozzle with Aiming Device can be rotated to the exact aiming
point and then tightened to hold that angle.
Before installing blow-off caps on nozzles, apply a small
amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the
opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the
exterior of the blow-off cap. DO NOT FORCE SILICONE
GREASE INTO NOZZLE TIP OPENING OR FILL CAP WITH
GREASE.
NOTICE
When using old style metal blow-off cap, make
certain the spring clip rotates freely on the metal
cap and coat the outside of the cap, including the
clip, with Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease.
8. Make certain a blow-off cap is in place over each nozzle tip.
These blow-off caps are designed to keep grease from build-
ing-up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent flow. See
Figure 15.
000303 000304 000305
FIGURE 15
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-7.1
REV. 0 7-1-09
INSTALLING THE AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE
(FOR CASTERED/MOVEABLE EQUIPMENT)
Agent Distribution Hose can be used in the supply line or appliance
branch line to allow a castered cooking appliance with castered
supports with nozzles attached directly to the appliance, to be
moved out of its normal operating position for service or cleaning.
,1~ WARNING
The following instructions must be followed in their entirety.
Failure to do so may result in the R-102 Fire Suppression
System not functioning properly due to incorrect installation.
CRITICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Design and installation must be performed by qualified
personnel.
The Agent Distribution Hose shall not be concealed within or
run through any wall, floor, or partition, and shall not have any
direct exposure to excessive heat or radiant flame from the
cooking appliances.
Strong cleaning solutions or chemical substances must not
come in contact with the Agent Distribution Hose. These may
include acids, solvents, fluxes with zinc chloride, or other chlo-
rinated chemicals. In case of contact, rinse down the Agent
Distribution Hose with water and dry thoroughly.
Contact with foreign objects, sharp edges, wiring, or
substances must be avoided.
Bending and flexing of Agent Distribution Hose on moveable
appliances (i.e. those factory equipped with casters) should
be limited to pulling and pushing the appliances in or out for
cleaning or maintenance. The hose shall never be installed or
bent tighter than a 3 in. (7.6 cm) radius (6 in. (15.2 cm) diam-
eter) loop.
The Agent Distribution Hose must not be kinked, twisted, or
have sharp bends when installed or when equipment is pulled
away from the wall.
Make sure that all fittings are tightened properly.
Adequate means must be provided to limit the movement of
castered appliances. A 36 in. (91.4 cm) long Restraining
Cable supplied with the agent distribution hose is required to
be used for all castered appliances using the Agent
Distribution Hose. (Refer to Restraining Cable Installation
Instructions.)
The Restraining Cable requires periodic maintenance to
ensure proper operation.
The Restraining Cable must be attached to the wall and appli-
ance anytime the distribution hose is connected to the appli-
ance.
Do not over-extend the Agent Distribution Hose when moving
equipment (for cleaning, maintenance, etc.).
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Before proceeding, CAREFULLY read all instructions, including all
CRITICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
General Requirements
The Agent Distribution Hose, Part No. 434462 (which is part
of Discharge Hose and Restraining Cable Kit, Part No.
435982), is 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) diameter x 60 in. (152.4 cm) long
and is provided with two (2) male NPT swivels for ease of
installation.
Maximum of six (6) Agent Distribution Hoses can be used in
each agent distribution piping network.
Agent Distribution Hose can only be used for castered appli-
ances or appliances setting on castered supports.
Maximum of two (2) Agent Distribution Hoses are allowed in
the supply line. However, the Agent Distribution Hose can only
be used at the castered appliance.
Maximum of two (2) Agent Distribution Hoses are allowed in
the branch line. An acceptable installation scenario would be
providing separate protection of two (2) (side-by-side) appli-
ances, each with its own Agent Distribution Hose and tether,
supplied from the same appliance branch.
The Agent Distribution Hose is to only be used in the distrib-
ution piping of a single 1 1/2 or 3 gal (5.7 or 11.4 L) tank or
two (2) manifolded 3 gal (11.4 L) R-102 extinguishing systems
or larger systems using combinations thereof. However, the
Agent Distribution Hose is never to be used to manifold two
(2) 3 gal (11.4 L) tanks.
Installation Requirements
Agent Distribution Hose must be connected to 3/8 in. NPT
black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel fittings. The
connection from hose to fitting requires a 1/2 in. x 3/8 in.
reducing coupling, Ansul Part No. 436228. All Agent
Distribution Hose connections must be sealed with pipe tape.
When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread on
the swivel ends of the hose. Wrap the tape (two turns
maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the hose
end fitting opening.
All connections of distribution piping to Agent Distributiàn
Hose for castered appliances, with distribution nozzles
installed/affixed to the appliance, must be located behind the
cooking equipment in an area protected from obstructions
and possible wear or damage.
3/8 in. schedule 40 pipe will need to be run from the hose
connection to the distribution nozzle(s) installed/affixed to the
appliance. Pipe must be installed and adequately secured at
a height at or below the cooking surface of the appliance. (See
Figure 21.)
All existing distribution pipe and fitting limitations must be
observed and followed. Each flex distribution hose used is to
be considered as an equivalent length of 3/8 in. pipe when
calculating the acceptable length (ft (m)) of allowable distribu-
tion pipe.
All hose-to-pipe connection fittings are to be oriented in a
vertical down position.
The hose connections must be positioned below an elevation
where the hose could be exposed to the radiant or convected
heat generated by normal cooking operations (such as the
horizontal plane of appliance's cooking surface), or to heat
from appliance exhaust. As a minimum height, the hose
connection shall be no lower than 30 in. (76.2 cm) from the
floor. The distribution piping shall be supported and secured
per local plumbing practices.
Hose ends are to be offset 6t0 8 in. (15.2 to 20.3 cm) center
to center of fittings (See Figure 16) to maximize hose life
expectancy and facilitate appliance movement. With the appli-
ance in its normal operating position, check the hose bend to
make certain the bend is not less than a 3 in. (7.6 cm) bend
radius (6 in. (15.2 cm) diameter).
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-7.2
7-1-09 REV. 0
S
S
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(Continued)
Installation Requirements (Continued)
OVERHEAD VIEW
W APPLIANCE A
L
L
PIPE (NOT
SUPPLIED IN
KIT)
HOSE
TETHER I 6-8 IN (1 5.2-20.3 cm) OFFSET PIPE (SUPPLIED ONLY WITH CENTER TO CENTER I-lENNY PENNY FRYER NOZZLE KIT,
PART NO. 434455)
FIGURE 16
007628
Restraining Cable Installation
Important: A Restraining Cable shall always be permanently
attached to the appliance and wall directly behind the appliance
when the Agent Distribution Hose is installed. Removal of this
cable shall only occur when the Agent Distribution Hose is not
installed to the appliance.
See Figure 17 for mounting the Restraining Cable to the wall. See
Figure 18 for mounting the Restraining Cable to the back of an
appliance.
RESTRAINING CABLE - WALL-MOUNTED OPTION
SHEET METAL
WALL -p- COVERED WALLS —ø-
STUD
WALL
MOUNT
SCREW ØBRACKET
EYE BOLT
141 SELF TAPPING
SHEET METAL
SCREWS
FIGURE 17
006088
RESTRAINING CABLE - APPLIANCE-MOUNTED OPTION
RESTRAINING CABLE - HENNY PENNY-MOUNTED OPTION
BACK OF---p-
APPLIANCE
PHILIPS
SCREW
EYE —*-C
NUT WASHER
FIGURE 19
008090
The Restraining Cable must be connected from the appliance
to the wall or some other structurally sound object capable of
restraining the castered appliance from being able to be
pulled or pushed out to a point that will result in strain or stress
to the Agent Distribution Hose.
The Restraining Cable should be installed in line with the
Agent Distribution Hose.
For sheet metal covered walls, the Restraining Cable
Assembly includes four (4) 3/4 in. x #8 self tapping sheet
metal screws, and a Restraining Cable Bracket. Securely
attach the Restraining Cable Bracket to the sheet metal
covered wall using the 3/4 in. x #8 self tapping metal screws
provided.
For mounting to wall studs, the Restraining Cable Assembly
includes one (1) screw eye lag bolt, 5116 in. x 2.5 in. (6.4 cm)
long.
Locate a structural area (frame) on the rear side of the equip-
ment that is in line with the wall attachment. Note: It may be
necessary to contact the appliance manufacturer for a suit-
able location. Drill a 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter hole. Use
caution when drilling hole, so that internal components are not
damaged.
The Restraining Cable Assembly also includes a 5/16 in.
threaded eye-bolt, 5/16 in. hex head nut, 5/16 in nylon lock
nut, and two (2) 5/16 in. flat washers. Thread the included hex
nut onto the eye-bolt. Slide one washer onto the eye-bolt
threads next to the nut. Then, slide the eye-bolt through the
drilled hole and place a washer and nylon locknut onto the
eye-bolt on the inside frame of the equipment. Tighten
securely.
BACK OF—.
APPLIANCE
NUT NYLON
EYE LOCK NUT
BOLT—,.
Li WASHER WASHER
FIGURE 18
008089
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT OF
HOSE
CONNECTION IS MIN TO BE BELOW 30 I THE APPLIANCE (76.2 COOKING CM) SURFACE
A-RE
CABLE I - SNAP HOOK
D - EYE BOLT
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-7.3
REV. 0 7-1-09
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(Continued)
Restraining Cable Installation (Continued)
7. Attach one of the snap hooks (included in the Restraining
Cable package) on the end of the Restraining Cable to the
wall bracket and the other snap hook to the eye-bolt (See
Figure 20). After snap-hooking the assembly, seal the
Restraining Cable Loops to the wall bracketry and appliance
connection hardware with ANSUL Lead Wire Seal, Part No.
197.
Note: For the Henny Penny Pressure Fryers that utilize the
ANSUL Henny Penny Fryer Nozzle Kit, Part No. 434455, the
5/16 in. philips screw supplied in the Henny Penny Fryer
Nozzle Kit, the 5/16 in. eye nut, and 5/16 in. washer included
in the Restraining Cable Assembly Kit, must be used. (See
Figure 19).
RESTRAINING CABLE
INSTALLATION PACKAGE
A - RESTRAINING CABLE
B - STAPLE F-5/16 IN NYLON BRACKET LOCK NUT
Tm G-5/16IN
X5/161N
C - 3/4 IN. X #8 0 WASHERS
SCREWS (4) (2)
H-SCREW % EYE BOLT
D- EYE BOLT
I - SNAP
HOOK
E -5/16 IN HEX NUT
Final Installation Guidelines and Checkout Procedures
After the Agent Distribution Hose and the Restraining Cable is
properly installed, carefully push the appliance back to its normal
operating position. Check that the hose does not have sharp
bends, and is not kinked, twisted, or caught on anything behind the
appliance.
Verify the Restraining Cable limits the travel of the appliance
and prevents the application of any pull force or bending
stress on the Agent Distribution Hose or hose-to-pipe connec-
tions.
Make certain there are no sharp bends and kinks in the hose
when pulling out the cooking equipment.
The Agent Distribution Hose should always be in a vertical
natural loop, never having any bends greater than a 3 in.
(7.6 cm) radius (6 in. (15.2 cm) diameter), hose twists, or
sharp bends. (See Figure 21.) If any of these conditions exist,
the hose and/or hose connections will require installation
modifications.
SIDE VIEW
ACCEPTABLE HOSE ORIENTATION
AGENT
DISTRIBUTION
3/8 IN
PIPING
B - STAPLE BRACKET
I - SNAP
HOOK
EYE BOLT FASTENING-ø-
HARDWARE
FIGURE 20
007829
UNACCEPTABLE HOSE ORIENTATION
SHARP BENDS TWISTING FATIGUE
sH Ho
FIGURE 21
007830
4. Return the appliance to its normal operating position in accor-
dance with NFPA 96. Means shall be provided to verify that
the appliance returns to its original designed positioning.
Failure to do so may result in undue stress and fatigue of the
hose and hose connections.
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-7.4
7-1-09 REV. 0
NOTES:
S
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-8
REV.3 7-1-09
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM
Before the following procedures can be completed, the detection
design must already be completed. These installation instructions
are identical for single, double, and multiple-tank systems except
for the number of hazard areas to be covered.
NOTICE
Inform customer that fusible links should not be
exposed to ammonia-based chemical cleaners
or steam.
Based on the requirements listed in the "System Design"
section, mount the detectors in their predetermined locations.
Run 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism trip
hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected for
mounting the detectors.
Note: Before assembling the conduit and fittings, make
certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips
and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and
dirt.
When changing the direction of conduit, use only ANSUL
pulley elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release, it is
acceptable to use the "Conduit Offset Assembly" (Part No.
436063).
Note: If stainless steel scissor linkage is used in the system
while using conduit off-set assembly, the following limitations
must be observed:
Maximum number of elbows- 16
Maximum number of detectors - 15
Maximum length of 1/2 in. EMT Conduit - 150 ft (45.7 m)
Part No. 435546 and 435547 are the "scissor" style series and
terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use
a detector linkage assembly which does not require the wire
rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is
being fed through the detection system.
"Scissor" Style Linkage Installation
1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two
1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector bracket
or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal
detector bracket. See Figure 22.
COMPRESSION
FITTING NUT
1/2 IN. STEEL /
COMPRESSION FITTING
FIGURE 22
000306
NOTICE
Do not use zinc die cast compression connec-
tors on the detection conduit lines as these will
not withstand the normally high temperatures
experienced in the plenum area.
2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening,
secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as
shown in Figure 23.
002463
002484
FIGURE 23
0
Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be
approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope
between the locking clamp and the weighted
device, which will be utilized when the linkage is
put in place.
Install detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure 28. Note
that the ANSUL AUTOMAN or remote release assembly is
located on the left side of the detector bracket. Slightly crimp
the two assembly "boot-hooks" over the cable with pliers so
the cable is captured under each hook but the whole assem-
bly can move from side to side. Center the assembly in the
detector bracket.
ANSULAUTOMAN"OR 010 op
REMOTE RELEASE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 28
000903
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-9
7-1-09 REV. 2
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) 2-3 IN.
"Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) (5-8 cm)
3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through
the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the
excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in
locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 24.
FIGURE 27
000312
6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation
of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted
device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an
LOCKING adequate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp
CLAMP and the weighted device.
NOTICE
When attaching the weighted device to the
excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in.
(8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for
proper installation.
FIGURE 24
000309
From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope
through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to
the terminal detector.
NOTICE
If wire rope requires splicing, make certain
splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any
pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid interfer-
ence.
Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as
shown in Figure 25 or as shown in Figure 26 if the terminal
detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and
install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from
the end of the wire rope. See Figure 27. Use the National
Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No.
51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve.
FIGURE 25
000310
0
FIGURE 26
000311
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-10
REV.3 7-1-09
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
"Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued)
8. Hook the fusible link on the ANSUL AUTOMAN or remote
release assembly side of the hook assembly, then pull the
fusible link to the opposite side and complete the hookup as
shown in Figures 29 and 30. The top of the hook assembly
must be inside the bracket stiffeners. The hook assembly with
the ANSUL fusible link in place must be located toward the
terminal detector side of the bracket.
FIGURE 29
000504
Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995 or Part No. 435603) on
left side of the release mechanism, with the movable flange
resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver
and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engag-
ing the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism.
See Figure 31.
<INC PIN
COCK
FIGURE 31
000319
Using long handle cocking lever, Part No. 14995, or wrench on
short handle cocking lever nut, Part No. 435603, pull down to
raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves
underneath the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See
Figure 32.
FIGURE 30
000324
9. Install the linkage and the correct ANSUL approved fusible link
in the remainder of the detector brackets. Make certain all
detector linkages are positioned against either the front or
back upper lip of the formed detector bracket. See Figure 30a.
0. FIGURE 32
000320
P. FIGURE 30a
004429
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-11
7-1-09 REV. 3
S INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
"Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued)
12. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on
left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting
stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position.
(The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclo-
sure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See
Figure 33.
16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base
of the wire rope locking clamp to make certain that there is a
minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in.
(9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer
locking clamp assembly and the cable lever assembly. See
Figure 35. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8
in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking
clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.)
S
TENSION LEVER
IN UP" POSITION
K BAR
)PERLY INSTALLED
IiJ
CT0
1
Make certain the hook assembly with the ANSUL fusible
link in place is located toward the terminal detector side of
each bracket. Failure to do so may restrict travel of detec-
tion line, causing system to malfunction.
TRIP HAMMER
ASSEMBLY LOCKING
CLAMP
1/4 IN. MINIMUM
(6.4 mm)
3/8 in. MAXIMUM
(9.5 mm)
N CABLE I LEVER
ASSEMBLY
/?\CAUTIC
Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu-
ation could cause system discharge.
FIGURE 33
000321
13. Make certain tension lever is in the 'UP" position. See No Figure 34.
FIGURE 35
000323
FIGURE 34
000322
Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link,
is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the terminal
detector side.
NOTICE
Due to the close adjustment between the trip
hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only
the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa-
tion in each detector, including terminal detec-
tor, to ensure correct adjustment when
performing Steps 15 and 16.
Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all
slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking
clamp.
Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and
Placing in Service Section, Page 7-1 - 7-3, of this manual.
When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in
the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in.
(5.1 cm) of wire rope below the locking clamp.
11
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION - OPTION 1
(ONE (1) WIRE ROPE CONNECTED TO CABLE LEVER ASSEMBLY) S
6 IN. (152 mm) MINIMUM
FROM CRIMP SLEEVE
TO PULLEY TEE
2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM
FROM CRIMP SLEEVE
TO COMPRESSION
FITTING
'PULLEY TEE
NO PULLEY ELBOWS
ALLOWED WHERE TWO WIRE
ROPES ARE PRESENT
USE (2) TWO
OVAL SLEEVES,
PART NO. 4596
RELEASE
- MECHANISM
ELBOW
- 008391
JUNCTION BOX (NOT REMOTE
SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) MANUAL PULL STATION
FIGURE 36a
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION - OPTION 2
(TWO (2) WIRE ROPES CONNECTED TO CABLE LEVER ASSEMBLY)
/-
PULLEY TEE PULLEY
ELBOW
RELEASE
MECHANISM
000335 REMOTE/
MANUAL PULL STATION
FIGURE 36b
OVAL
SLEEVE
CABLE
LEVER LOCK
uN BAR
JUNCTON BOX (NOT
SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION APPLICATION - OPTION 3
008392
RELEASE
MECHANISM
CAI
LE\
FIGURE 36c
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-12
REV. 4 7-1-09
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
To install a remote manual pull station complete the following
steps:
Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover
is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu-
lated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to
system actuation.
Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release
assembly and that the regulated release assembly is in the
cocked position.
If regulated release assembly does not have lock bar inserted
or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual Maintenance,"
Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete
Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps.
Select a convenient location in the path of egress for mount-
ing the pull station(s) to the wall. The pull station should be
installed at a height of 42 in. to 48 in. (107 cm to 122 cm) in
accordance with the authority having jurisdiction and the
American Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
A maximum of two (2) manual pull stations can be connected
to each AUTOMAN Release.
lNSTALLATlON FOR REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
UTILIZING EMT CONDUIT ONLY
The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull
station within a system must not exceed 150 ft (46 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per
each manual pull station is 20 of Part No. 423250 or 415670.
If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box
to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with
mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is
positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and
readable.
Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and
pulley elbows from each pull station junction box to regulated
release assembly as necessary. See Figure 36.
See Figures 36a, 36b, and 36c for optional methods of
installing wire rope when utilizing a pulley tee, Part No.
427929.
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION
PULLEY
ELBOW
WIRE ROPE
OVAL SLEEVE
CABLE
LEVER
MECHANISM
REMOTE '-
MANUAL PULL
STATION BREAK ROD LOCK BAR
SIDE : STUD
JUNCTION Box (NOT " RING HANDLE IIGURE 36 SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) 001090
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual Main-
tenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section,
and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following
installation steps.
3. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 37.
CARTRIDGE RECEIVER
PLUG
FIGURE 37
000339
Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32 in.
(0.6 cm) holes on right side of the enclosure. Assemble with
screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See Figure
38. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the inverted posi-
tion, allowing for direct exit out the knockout(s) in the bottom
of the enclosure. See Figure 39.
FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
ULEX347O ULCEX347O Page 5-13
7-1-09 REV. 3
5 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION (Continued)
INSTALLATION FOR REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
UTILIZING EMT CONDUIT ONLY (Continued)
MINIMUM OF
6 IN. (152
rl_RT NO. 4596 TO AIR
CYLINDER
I MNIMUM OF NO ELBOWS ALLOWED FOR GAS
6 N. (152 mm) II WHERE TWO WIRE
II ROPES ARE PRESENT
VALVES OR
RELEASE
CABLE
LEVER FOR
SPLICE D WIRE
CONTINUOUS WIRE
ROPE ROPE PULL
STATIONS
PULLEY TEE, PART
NO. 427929 ONLY
TO EITHER GAS VALVES OR PULL -
STATONS. MIXING IS NOT ALLOWED.
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
NOTICE
Mechanical gas valves are designed for indoor
installation only.
To install each Mechanical Gas Shut-off Valve complete the follow-
ing steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be made in
accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.)
Note: Mechanical gas valve air cylinder(s) can be installed in
regulated release assemblies and also regulated actuator assem-
blies. Installation in either is the same.
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover
is detached and lock bar is properly inserted in the regulated
release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to
system actuation.
006393 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release
FIGURE 36d assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the
cocked position.
Feed wire rope from the ANSUL AUTOMAN release through
conduit and pulley elbows and pulley tee, if provided, to the
pull station junction box. Follow the instructions for assem-
bling the pull station and block assembly and attaching the
wire rope to the pull station pull knob (see Figures 64 through
79).
NOTICE
Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in
S center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft (15 m) wire rope
has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do
not allow the spliced ends to be within 6 in. (152
cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor.
Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction
box is used).
. 6. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope through
cable lever guide holes and back through the oval crimp
sleeve. See Figure 36.
7. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. (Use the
National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool
Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.)
See Figure 36.
Note: When utilizing flexible conduit for remote manual pull station
or mechanical gas valve installation, refer to "Installation of
Remote Manual Pull Station or Mechanical Gas Valve Utilizing
Flexible Conduit" instructions on pages 5-17 through 5-17.11.
STOP SLEEVE WIRE ROPE
MOUNTING BRACKET
AIR CYLINDER
ROD
rfl -
1--
1/8 IN. COPPER
TUBING AND FITTINGS FIGURE 38
000340
TWO (2) WIRE ROPES CONNECTED BETWEEN A PULLEY
ELBOW AND A PULLEY TEE
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-14
REV. 3 7-1-09
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) Q
TOP KNOCKOUTS
BOTTOM
KNOCKOUTS
HANICAL
VALVE
CYLINDER
REGULATED
SE
FIGURE 39
000341
Note: Two air cylinders are necessary only if the old style
pulley tee, Part No. 15342, is utilized. If new style pulley tee,
Part No. 427929, is utilized, only one air cylinder is required.
Individual wire ropes can be run from each gas valve to a
single air cylinder. See Figure 40.
5. To install second mechanical gas valve shut-off system, locate
second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent to first
assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in. (.6 cm) holes
provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble second
cylinder with screws, lockwashers, and nuts as required.
Wrench tighten. See Figure 40.
WIRE ROPE STOP-1 SLEEVES
(SYSTEMS USING
PART NO. 15342)
AIR CYLINDER
PULLEY TEE, RODS
MOUNTING
BRACKETS
LJ 000342
1/8 IN. COPPER
TUBING AND FITTINGS
-
/ / (SYSTEMS USING
PULLEY TEE, PART NO. STOP
427929) / SLEEVES
NOTE: NO ELBOWS
ARE ALLOWED ..-
BETWEEN AUTOMAN
AND PULLEY TEE -
004655 FIGURE 40
000342
S
rWAY:
APPLIED NEXT
3EING INSERTED
S EXCESS
IN VALVE BODY.
CORRECT WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED NEXT
TO PIPE BEING INSERTED.
PREVENTS EXCESS
STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. WRflN0 WAY
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-15
7-1-09 REV. 4
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
6. Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for each
air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on the
regulated release mechanism. See Figures 38 and 40.
NOTICE
Do not kink 1/8 in. copper tubing or form a bend
too close to a fitting. Secure each fitting without
over tightening. Over tightening could result in
pressure leakage or line separation at actuation.
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make
certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the
gas valve. Gas valve installation shall be performed by
qualified individuals in accordance with local jurisdiction
requirements.
Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas line
so that it ensures safe shut-oft to all predetermined appliances
being protected upon actuation of the system. Mechanical gas
valves may be mounted in any convenient horizontal or verti-
cal position. See Figure 41.
Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal chips.
Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow
shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve
casting, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe tape,
is
paste, spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra care should
be taken to avoid overtightening. Apply lubricant to male
threads only.
Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT USE GAS
VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE
DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 41.
If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
If neqessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with
the authority having jurisdiction.
The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve must
not exceed 150 ft (46 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for each
gas valve is 20.
ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
CORRECT WAY:
VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE
BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY.
000343
CORRECT WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE
I
WRONG WAY: BEING INSERTED PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. o WRENCH APPLIED
AT THIS POINT
STRAINS VALVE
XX BODY.
000344
ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
FIGURE 41
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-16
REV. 3 7-1-09
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbow(s) from the mechanical
gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as neces-
sary.
Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the end
of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder rod. See
Figure 38.
Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley elbow.
Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley
sheave. If the 50 ft (15 m) wire rope has been spliced to accom-
modate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within
12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor.
Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire rope
through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part No.
26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National
Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No.
51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make
certain crimp is on top of trigger, with wire rope curled under
lever. See Figure 42.
TRIGGER
P. FIGURE 42 000347
With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole in air
cylinder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto wire rope
and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this time. See
Figure 38.
Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 43. Note: A
valve cocking tool is available. Order Part No. 416018.
ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
FIGURE 43
Raise air cylinder rod 'UP" to its maximum extended position.
See Figure 38.
Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack.
Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all
slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See Figure
38.
Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (2 cm) from
end of stop sleeve.
Note: If utilizing a pulley tee to operate either a single
mechanical gas valve from two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN
releases or two (2) mechanical gas valves from one (1) air
cylinder in an ANSUL AUTOMAN release, see Figures 44 and
45 for installation instructions. Maximum length of wire rope to
each ANSUL AUTOMAN r91ease must not exceed 150 ft (45.7
m) and maximum number of elbows must not exceed 20.
TWO (2) AIR CYLINDERS - ONE (1) MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
ITO AIR CYLINDER IN TO AIR CYLINDER IN
"ANSUL AUTOMAN" "ANSUL AUTOMAN"
RELEASE NO. 1 RELEASE NO.2
6 IN. (152 mm) MINIMUM NO PULLEY ELBOWS - FROM CRIMP SLEEVE .m- ALLOWED WHERE TWO TO PULLEY TEE WIRE ROPES ARE PRESENT
2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM USE (2) TWO
FROM CRIMP SLEEVE OVAL SLEEVES,
TO COMPRESSION PART NO, 4596
FITTING. - 1-24,
P. FIGURE 44
001091
NOTICE
E ROPE DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS
VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve System
must have gas valve cocked and air cylinder rod
extended "UP" to its maximum extension before
completing next step.
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17
7-1-09 REV. 4
S INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)
I" ONE (1)AIR CYLINDER—TWO (2) MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
TO AIR CYLINDER IN
MINIMUM OF 6 IN. "ANSUL AUTOMAN
(152 mm) RE LEASE
(2) TWO OVAL SLEEVES,
PART NO. 4596
MINIMUM OF 6 IN. - NO ELBOWS ALLOWED
(152 mm) WHERE TWO WIRE ROPES
ARE PRESENT
SPLICED WIRE ROPE CONTINUOUS
WIRE ROPE
PULLEY TEE,
PART NO. 427929 ONLY
NOTE: EITHER BOTH MUST BE
GAS VALVES OR BOTH MUST
BE PULL STATIONS. MIXING IS
NOT ALLOWED.
FIGURE 45
008394
NOTICE
When connecting two (2) mechanical gas
valves to one (1) air cylinder, make certain both
gas valves properly operate (close) when the air
S INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
cylinder rod is in the down (operated) position.
Flexible conduit allows for quicker installations and the conve-
nience of being able to route the cable over, under and around
obstacles.
Flexible conduit can be used as a substitute for standard EMT
conduit or can be used with EMT conduit.
NOTICE
Flexible conduit can be used only with NEW
remote pull station, Part No. 434618, and
mechanical gas valve installations. Flexible
conduit CAN NOT be used in detection
systems.
These instructions address the components and installation of
both the pull station, Part No. 434618, and the flexible conduit.
Design Requirements
Flexible conduit cannot be utilized in detection systems.
Flexible conduit inserts, Part No. 434347, can ONLY be used
with the flexible conduit system.
The maximum distance from an ANSUL AUTOMAN® Release to
a Pull Station, Part No. 434618, is 140 ft (42.7 m) with a
maximum of 360° (for example, 3-90° and 2-45° bends, 2-900
and 4-45° bends, etc.) bends in the flexible conduit, one pulley
tee (refer to pages 5-17.9 through 5-17.11 for detailed splicing
instructions), two splices, and 15 pulley elbows.
Note: When installing flexible conduit, make sure to feed wire
rope through conduit directly from the spool. DO NOT pre-cut
wire rope. Feeding pre-cut rope through flexible conduit will
cause excessive kinks in the rope, making it difficult to install.
The maximum distance from an ANSUL AUTOMAN Release to
a mechanical gas valve is 75 ft (22.9 m) with a maximum of 4-
900 bends in the flexible conduit and 4 pulley elbows.
Any portion of the flexible conduit system can be substituted with
EMT conduit provided the proper connections are used to join
the two types of conduit.
All bends in the flexible conduit system must have a minimum
bend diameter of 6 in. (15 cm).
° When the flexible conduit is used to make 90° bends between an
ANSUL AUTOMAN release and a mechanical gas valve, the
bends must start at the gas valve. No pulley elbows can be used
between the bends. If more than 3600 of bends are needed, then
pulley elbows can be used.
When the flexible conduit is used to make 90° bends between an
ANSUL AUTOMAN release and a pull station, the bends must
start at the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. No pulley elbows can be
used between the bends. If more than 360° of bends are
needed, then pulley elbows can be used.
When not utilizing a conduit offset, Part No. 79825, 2-450 bends
in the flexible conduit are allowed between the strain relief fitting
on top of the ANSUL AUTOMAN release, and the location where
the flexible conduit is supported.
When installing flexible conduit, conduit should be secured at
intervals not to exceed 5 ft (1.5 m) and before and after each
bend. Flexible conduit CANNOT slide in the clamp(s) used for
mounting. Make certain mounting clamp(s) do not pinch the
conduit. The following style clamp ('P clip), Part No. 436150, is
a suitable type for use on flexible conduit.
11401711M)
008141
TABLE 1
Mechanical
Manual Pull Gas Valve Detection
90° Cable Bends 4 4 N/A
Bend Diameter - in. (cm) 6(15.2) 6(15.2) N/A
Mechanical Corner Pulley 15 4 N/A
Conduit Secured Max. ft (m) 5(1.5) 5(1.5) N/A
Conduit Max. Length ft (m) 140 (42.7) 75 (22.9) N/A
Conduit Offset or 2-450 Bends 1 0 N/A
(Only between the strain relief
fitting and support location
Pulley Tees 1 0 N/A
Splices 2 0 N/A
FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
INSERT
/ THREADS
/ MUST FACE
OUT
FIGURE 49 • 007988
SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.1
REV.0 7-1-09
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Installation Instructions
Note: Do not add any type of lubricants inside or on the flexible
conduit. Make certain stainless steel wire rope is clean and debris-
free.
The flexible conduit should be routed along the same path that
EMT conduit would normally be run. Stainless steel wire rope
should be routed through the flexible conduit as it is in EMT
conduit.
Flexible conduit must not be located within 6 in. (15 cm) of the
hood or in areas exceeding 130 OF (54 °C). Also, do not route
flexible conduit in areas where conduit can be crushed,
pinched, or broken.
Flexible conduit can be used to connect an ANSUL AUTOMAN
Release to a remote pull station, Part No. 434618, or mechanical
gas valves.
Before starting the system installation, take a few minutes to plan
the layout of the system. This will minimize the amount of compo-
nents needed to complete the installation. Once the path of the
flexible conduit has been determined, verify that the layout does
not exceed the design requirements.
Connecting the Flexible Conduit to the ANSUL AUTOMAN
Release, Electrical Junction Box, or MECHANICAL Gas Valve
1. Layout the flexible conduit and secure it in place. Note: If inner
liner is crimped, turn a drywall screw into the end to open it.
See Figure 46.
* **
IF SLIGHTLY CRIMPED,
1 URN IN DRYWALL
DC E'.' 0 OPEN
2. Starting at the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release, connect the
conduit connector using the supplied nut. Use only ANSUL
conduit fittings, Part No. 55813. See Figure 47.
FIGURE 47
007986
Unscrew the nut from the EMT conduit connector and remove
the compression ring. Discard ring. See Figure 48.
lIti- NUT
T k. 4tL DISCARD
RING
FIGURE 48
007987
Thread the stainless steel wire rope through the EMT conduit
connector and flexible conduit insert. Make certain thread in
flexible conduit insert is facing out toward end of connector.
See Figure 49. .
FIGURE 46
007985
TIGHTEN
VE
CONDUIT
-
INSERT
L
-L
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.2
7-1-09 REV. 0
S
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Connecting the Flexible Conduit to the ANSUL AUTOMAN
Release, Electrical Junction Box, or Mechanical Gas Valve
(Continued)
5. Tighten the nut to the connector body, locking the flexible
conduit insert in place. See Figure 50.
FIGURE 50
007989
6. Loosen the nut on the strain relief and thread the wire rope
through a strain relief. See Figure 51.
ç'1.1 LOOSEN
NUT
FIGURE 51
007990
7. Tighten the body of the strain relief to the conduit connector.
See Figure 52.
Thread the wire rope through the flexible conduit. See Figure
53. (If a splice is required in the flexible conduit, proceed to
"Splicing Installation Instructions."
)
FIGURE 53
007992
Slide the flexible conduit into the strain relief until it is approx-
imately 1/16 in. (2 mm) from the bottom of the flexible conduit
insert. See Figure 54.
STOP FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
APPROXIMATELY
1/16 IN. (2 mm)
FROM THE BOTTOM
OF INTERNAL
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
INSERT
FIGURE 54
007993
Tighten the strain relief nut onto the strain relief. See Figure
55.
TIGHTEN
STRAIN RELIEF
INTO CONDUIT
CONNECTOR
Li
FIGURE 52
007991
TIGHTEN NUT
ON STRAIN
RELIEF
I.
S
Loosen the nut on the strain relief and thread the wire rope
through the strain relief. See Figure 59.
FIGURE 59
037998
Tighten the body of the strain relief to the conduit connector.
See Figure 60.
FIGURE 60
D7999
Push the wire rope into the flexible conduit. See Figure 61.
FIGURE 61
is 008000
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.3
REV. 0 7-1-09
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Connecting Flexible Conduit to Pulley Elbows, Pulley Tees, or
Union Fittings
1. Unscrew the nut from pulley elbow, pulley tee, or EMT corduit
connector and remove the compression ring. Discard ring.
See Figure 56.
FIGURE 56
- O795
2. Thread the stainless steel wire rope through the EMT conduit
connector and flexible conduit insert. Make certain thread in
flexible conduit insert is facing out toward end of connector.
See Figure 57.
FIGURE 57
O76
3. Tighten the nut to the connector conduit body, locking the flex-
ible conduit insert in place. See Figure 58.
FIGURE 58
007997
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.4
7-1-09 REV. 0
S
S
S
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Connecting Flexible Conduit to Pulley Elbows, Pulley Tees, or
Union Fittings (Continued)
Slide the flexible conduit into the strain relief until it is approx-
imately 1/16 in. (2 mm) from the bottom of the flexible conduit
insert. See Figure 62.
FIGURE 62
008001
Tighten the strain relief nut onto the strain relief. See Figure
63.
FIGURE 63
808002
Complete the same procedures on the other end of the
conduit fitting as described in Steps 1 through Step 8 above.
Assembling the Block
Note: For installations that do not require the tee block, refer
to page 5-17.12 for instructions.
1. The flexible conduit and wire rope should be connected to the
electrical box as described in "Connecting the Flexible
Conduit to the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release, Electrical Box, or
Mechanical Gas Valve." See Figure 64.
Note: For 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) deep electrical box, the bearing
should be installed in the block's shallow box location.
For 2 1/8 in. (5.4 cm) deep electrical box, the bearing should
be installed in the block's deep box location.
- FIGURE 64
808003
Thread the wire rope through the small end of the block into
the bearing area to be used. See Figure 65.
SMALL END OF BLOCK L
FIGURE 65
008004
Pull slack, make a loop and insert the rope through the larger
opening in the bearing area. See Figure 66.
PUSH WIRE ROPE
THROUGH
LARGER
OPENING
FIGURE 66
008005
CAN BE INSERTED
AT 90 INTERVALS
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.5
REV. 0 7-1-09
n INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIELE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Assembling the Block (Continued)
Pull wire rope out of the large end of the block, See Figure 67.
FIGURE 67
008006
Place the bearing against the wire rape. IVake certain wire
rope is in the bearing groove. See Figure 68.
BEARING
GROOVE
FIGURE 68
006007
Align the bearing against the wire rope so that The bearing
center and the hole in the block line up. See igure 69.
001"
Insert the supplied bolt into the bearing and tighten securely.
Take care not to strip the thread. See Figure 70.
FIGURE 70
008009
Connecting the Block and the Faceplate
The block can be inserted into the faceplate at 900 intervals.
See Figure 71.
FIGURE 71
008010
Thrèad the wire rope through the faceplate. Insert the block by
depressing the tabs and pushing the block into the faceplate
until it snaps in place. See Figure 72.
PUSH BLOCK ,----
INTO
FACEPLATE
FIGURE 72
008011
S
I
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.6
7-1-09 REV.0
S
S
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Connecting the Block and the Faceplate (Continued)
Place the faceplate over the top of the electrical box and insert
the two screws to secure the faceplate. See Figure 73.
FIGURE 73
808012
Thread the wire rope through the pull knob. See Figure 74.
FIGURE 74
008013
Thread the wire rope through stop sleeve and leave approxi-
mately 1/4-3/8 in. extended past sleeve. Crimp the stop sleeve
twice using Crimping tool, National Telephone Supply Co.
Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887). Verify the stop
sleeve is secure on the wire rope. See Figure 75.
LEAVE 1138 It'.
€9 r'inj
FIGURE 75
008014
Insert the break rod into the two holes toward the top of the
pull knob. See Figure 76.
FIGURE 76
008015
Pull the excess slack back to the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release.
This will pull the pull knob assembly in place. See Figure 77.
41
FIGURE 77
008016
Hold the pull knob assembly against the faceplate. Rotate the
pull knob assembly counterclockwise until the break rod and
pull knob snap in place. See Figure 78.
Note: Take care in snapping in the ends of the break rod into
the pull station side shields while rotating the entire assembly.
ROTATE
COUNTER
CLOCKWISE .
FIGURE 78
008017
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.7
REV. 0 7-1-09
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATiON OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE COIDLIT
(Continued)
Connecting the Block and the Faceplate (Cortinu9d)
9. Snap the pull tab onto the pull knob so it is legible. See Figure
79.
FIGURE 79
- 608018
Refer to R-102 or PIRANHA installation manual tD cc-rrplete
system installation.
Test Remote Manual Pull Station and Mechanica 3as- Valves
in accordance with the Testing and Placing in Sevce"
Testing Manual Pull Station and Testing Mechanical Gas
Valves section of this manual.
Installing Flexible Conduit Through a Conduit Offset is
Starting at the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release, connect the
conduit connector using the supplied nut. Use only ANSUL
conduit fittings, Part No. 55813. See Figure 80.
FIGURE 80
007986
Install Conduit Offset, Part No. 79825, into conduit connector
and tighten nut. See Figure 81:
Install compression union to opposite end of conduit offset.
Tighten securely. See Figure 82.
FIGURE 82 S
008040
SECTION V.- INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.8
7-1-09 REV. 0
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Installing Flexible Conduit Through a Conduit Offset
(Continued)
4. Install the conduit required to get above the ceiling. See
Figure 83.
FIGURE 83
008041
5. Install compression union to top of conduit riser. See Figure
84.
Remove strain relief nut and install strain relief body into
compression union. See Figure 86.
FIGURE 86
008044
Install union nut over strain relief body and tighten nut. See
Figure 87.
Pi
FIGURE 84
008042
6. Remove union nut and ring. Discard ring. Do not reinstall nut
at this time. See Figure 85.
FIGURE 87
008045
9. Install strain relief nut onto strain relief body. Do not tighten nut
at this time. See Figure 88.
FIGURE 88
008046
S
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.9
REV. 0 7-1-09
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Installing Flexible Conduit Through a Conduit Offset
(Continued)
Push flexible conduit completely through conduit offset.
Flexible conduit should stop flush or +/-1/2 in. (1.3 cm) from
bottom conduit fitting in ANSUL AUTOMAN Release. See
Figure 89.
Tighten nut on strain relief on top of conduit riser. See Figure
90.
ia
FIGURE 90
008048
Complete the remainder of the flexible conduit and wire rope
installation to the pull station or the gas valve.
Flexible Conduit Splicing (Allowed on Pull Station
Installations Only)
Note: Wire rope cannot be spliced together, only the flexible
conduit.
Flexible conduit can be spliced together using EMT compression
fitting union, Fart No. 79827.
Remove rings from both ends of compression union. See
Figure 91.
FIGURE 91
Install strain relief nut, strain relief, compression union nut,
flexible conduit insert and compression union over the flexible
conduit with wire rope installed. See Figure 92.
-AIL
FIGURE 92
008049
Tighten compression union nut onto union body, locking flexi-
ble conduit insert in place. See Figure 93.
FIGURE 93
008050
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.10
7-1-09 REV.0
S INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued) 7. Install strain relief nut, strain relief, and compression union nut
Flexible Conduit Splicing (Allowed on Pull Station on remaining section of flexible conduit and install flexible
Installations Only) (Continued) conduit insert on wire rope. See Figure 97.
4. Install strain relief body into compression union and tighten. -- -
See Figure 94.
FIGURE 97
008054
I
FIGURE 94
008051
Push flexible conduit into strain relief until it is approximately
1/16 in. (2 mm) from the bottom of the flexible conduit insert,
then tighten strain relief nut onto strain relief body. See Figure
95.
FIGURE 95
008052
Starting on the opposite end of the compression union,
remove the nut. See Figure 96.
Push wire rope completely through remaining section of flexi-
ble conduit. See Figure 98.
FIGURE 98
808055
Tighten compression union nut onto union body, securing flex-
ible conduit insert in place. See Figure 99.
S
-
FIGURE 99
008056
- FIGURE 96
008053
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
ULEX347O ULCEX347O Page 5-17.11
REV. 0 7-1-09
S INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Flexible Conduit Splicing (Allowed on Pull Station
Installations Only) (Continued)
Tighten strain relief into compression union. See Figure 100.
FIGURE 100
008007
Push flexible conduit into strain relief until it is approximately
1/16 in. (2 mm) from the bottom of the flexible conduit insert,
then tighten strain relief nut onto strain relief body. See Figure
101.
FIGURE 101
008058
Complete the remainder of the flexible conduit and wire rope
installation to the pull station or the gas valve.
Component Removal Instructions
Removal of Block
Using thumbs on the clips on each side of the block, press firmly
in the direction of the center of the block, at the same time press-
ing in a slightly downward direction. As the clips on the side of the
block release from the pull station cover, the block will release and
be free to be removed from the backside of the cover. See Figure
102.
FIGURE 102
007884
Removal of Pull Knob
Insert a small screwdriver in.0 slot at bottom of pull knob. Push
slightly on the screwdriver and turn pull knob clockwise, ti-en pu I
knoo can be removed without breaking the glass rod. See Figure
103.
FIGURE 103
]08055
Removal of Pull Cap
Using a small screwdriver or other blunt object, push on thE back-
side of the pull cap. This wil. free the cap from the pull knoo. See
Figure 104.
FIGURE 104
0.8060
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-17.12
7-1-09 REV. 0 . INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Pull Station Installation without Pulley Block Assembly
Note 1: When using this installation option, the distance from
the back of the faceplate and the connection to the 1/2 in. EMT
conduit compression fitting must not exceed 6 in. (15.2 cm).
Note 2: To provide for a straight run of wire rope from the pull
station, an octagonal junction box with a center knockout in the
back of the junction box will be needed. See Figure 104a. If a pre-
fabricated box or enclosure is to be used, it must allow the pull
station face plate to be firmly attached to the box or enclosure, with
a hole or knockout suitable for a 1/2 in. EMT threaded conduit
compression connector to be installed directly in line with the
center of the pull station pull knob.
S H•
- FIGURE 104a
008415
Attach a 1/2 in. EMT conduit compression fitting (Part No.
55813) to the back center knock out of the junction box. If
something other than a junction box is to be utilized, a method
of securing the flexible conduit or EMT conduit directly in line
with the center of the pull station pull knob must be used. This
will ensure that in the event of manual operation the wire rope,
exiting the back of the pull station faceplate, will be pulled
straight out without binding or resulting in undue additional pull
force due to friction loss.
Remove the block assembly from the pull station face plate.
Thread the wire rope from either flexible conduit or 1/2 in. EMT
conduit attached to the back of the junction box or fabricated
enclosure through the back side of the pull station faceplate
and through the pull knob.
Thread the wire rope through the stop sleeve (Part No. 26317)
and leave approximately 1/4 in. to 3/8 in. (6 mm to 10 mm)
extending past the sleeve.
Crimp the stop sleeve twice using the crimping tool National
Telephone Supply Co. Nicopress Sleeve Toll (Stock No, 51-C-
887). Verify the sleeve is secure on the wire rope.
0
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-18
REV. 6 7-1-09
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
NOTICE
Electric gas valves are designed for indoor
installation only.
The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of
procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-oft Valves.
Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover
is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu-
lated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to
system actuation.
Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release
assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the
cocked position.
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi-Annual
Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination"
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps.
CORRECT WAY:
VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE
BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY.
001092
CORRECT WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE
BEING INSERTED PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY.
WRONG WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED AT
THIS POINT STRAINS
VALVE BODY.
FIGURE 105
Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas valve
to manual reset relay enclosure. - To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make 5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve. certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape or gas valve. Gas valve installation shall be performed by place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance with qualified individuals in accordance with local jurisdiction authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures at the end of this requirements. section for typical wiring diagrams.
Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas 6.
line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appli-
ances being protected upon actuation of the system. Refer to
manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure 105.
Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal chips.
Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal pipe
line with no more than a five degree (50) lean either way.
Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow
shown on gas valve.
If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with
authority having jurisdiction.
Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main
power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main
power could cause personal injury or death if contact is
made with energized wires. .
CAUTION
All electrical wiring/connections shall be performed by
qualified individuals in accordance with local jurisdiction
requirements.
Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with any
contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer to
manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for assis-
tance. -
Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor-
dance with authority having jurisdiction.
Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release
assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure.
If snap-action switches have not been attached, go to "Electric
Switch" section and install them at this time by completing
Steps 3 through 8.
Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap-action)
switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay.
Connect wiring from each electric (snap-action) switch to
manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's instruc-
tions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance:
Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor-
dance with authority hay ng jurisdiction.
Properly return electrical power to the system.
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-19
7-1-09 REV. 5
fl INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
The procedure for field installing an electric (snap-action) switch is
as follows:
CAUTION
Unused wire leads will become "hot" when the system is oper-
ated. Failure to adequately cover exposed wire end(s) will
cause electric shock if touched.
Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main
power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main
power could cause personal injury or death if contact is made
with energized wires.
NOTICE
Except for the Alarm Initiating Switch, all electri-
cal wiring connections are to be made outside
the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release enclosure in
suitable enclosures in accordance with local
jurisdiction requirements.
1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover
is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the regu-
lated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to
system actuation.
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release
assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the
cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not
have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the
"Semi-Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance
Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before
completing the following installation steps.
If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole-
noid, it will also have a factory installed switch.
3. Press each wire assembly onto the 3-terminals located on the
switch(s). Be sure that the connector is pressed tight against
the switch. See Figure 106.
BLACK SNAP-ACTION
SWITCH
I COMMON RED
-
BLACK'
BROWN 0 NO.
- BROWN:
N.--
j
PRESS CONNECTOR
TIGHTLY AGAINST SWITCH
NOTE: SWITCH SHOWN IN NORMAL POSITION
ACTUATING
ARM
FIGURE 106
001621
4. Install switch(es) to the mounting bracket using provided
fasteners and tighten securely.
5. If more than one switch is being installed, it is necessary to
attach the trip lever extension stud to the trip lever. See Figure
107. Using the provided fasteners, securely install the exten-
sion stud.
6. Raise switch actuating arm squarely over the cam surface of
the trip lever. This will allow the trip lever, when actuated, to
force the actuating arm "UP," thus reversing the normal condi-
tion of the switch. See Figure 107.
For multiple switch installations, make certain switch actuating
arms are positioned on trip lever extension stud.
Before proceeding with Step 7, test electric (snap-action)
switches:
Remove lock bar. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the
cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch up.
If the switch is working properly there should be an audible
click.
With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the
lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click.
When installing multiple switches, make certain all switches
transfer when the release operates. If they do not, readjust
their position.
If an audible click is heard in the fired position several
adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can
be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed
up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this
doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the
switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the
switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final
adjustment can be made by removing the snap action
switch and bending the lever slightly.
After adjustments repeat steps a and b. Then, recock
ANSUL AUTOMAN and install lock bar.
001624
FIGURE 107
CAUTION
All electrical wiring/connections shall be performed by qualified
individuals in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements.
7. The switch may now be connected to compatible components
that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer to compo-
nent manufacturer's instructions for proper wiring connections
to compatible components.
ACTUATING ARM
MOUNTING HOLE FOR TRIP
LEVER EXTENSION
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-20
REV. 3 7-1-09
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES (Continued)
NOTICE
Except for the Alarm Initiating Switch, all electri-
cal wiring connections are to be made outside
the ANSUL AUTOMAN Release enclosure in
suitable enclosures in accordance with local
jurisdiction requirements.
Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor-
dance with authority having jurisdiction.
NOTICE
Do not connect power source to any relay,
contactor, or contractor supplied devices until all
other electrical connections are made. Refer to
proper section or manufacturer supplied instruc-
tions for recommended installation procedures
for these devices.
Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay,
contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used.
INSTALLING ALARM INITIATING SWITCH
The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, consists of:
Alarm Initiating Switch Assembly - Rated 50 mA 28VDC
Spacer
Mounting Screw with Nut (2)
Extension Pin
Extension Pin Nut
Instruction Sheet
The Alarm Initiating Switch is mounted in the ANSUL AUTOMAN
Release on the same mounting plate where the current snap-
action switches are mounted. If the alarm initiating switch is used
alone, the enclosed extension pin and pin nut are not needed.
When mounting the switch, the spacer must be installed first,
between the ANSUL AUTOMAN mounting plate (or existing
switches) and the alarm initiating switch.
See NFPA 72, "National Fire Alarm Code," Initiating Devices
section, for the correct method of wiring connection to the fire
alarm panel.
After the switch is properly mounted, follow the steps listed in the
installation section of the Design, Installation, Recharge, and
Maintenance Manual for correct positioning of the switch lever on
the ANSUL AUTOMAN cam surface:
TOWARD
SPACER WHEN SPACER AND
AUTOMAN
i
SWITCH ARE PROPERLY
N MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER
MUST BE BETWEEN THE
N.C. AND N.C. TERMINALS
END-OF-LINE RESISTOR
FIRE ALARM OR NEXT DEVICE
CONTROLPANEL
------------
ALARM
CIRCUIT
004891 ALARM INITIATING
SWITCH
NCORRECT
__ IIV4II
_ _ S I hil hill
I I 004905 IN OUT IN OUT
CORRECT - SEPARATE INCOMING AND OUTGOING CONDUCTORS
FIGURE 109
Note: With the exception of the Alarm Initiating Switch, all electri-
cal connections must be made in an approved electrical box which
also meets NEC article 314.43 (D) Grounding Provisions.
N.O.
N.C. S
ALARM INITIATING
SWITCH
FIGURE 108
004890
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-20.1
7-1-09 REV. 0
n
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS
Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-off Valve
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
POWER SOURCE MANUAL RESET
RELAY
ELECTRIC
SNAP-ACTION
SWITCH
ELECTRIC GAS VALVE
\
JUNCTION BOXES
(NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)
000273
WIRING SCHEMATIC
WIRING SCHEMATIC - RELAY PART NO. 426151
ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH
(SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL
AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION)
F--
BLACK
RED
BROWN
S
I RESET POWER
I INDICATOR
DI GN
Iffi
W1
I RELAY COIL __-_-___o.of±.
6 13 9
jr
— I 4',
I 7 1 1 - _G4L7
MANUAL RESET RELAY
I (PART NO. 426151)
ELECTRIC RATING
1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC
1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC
L2 NEUTRAL
LI HOT 110 VAC/60HZ
GAS VALVE
SEE NOTE 3 002402
FIGURE 110
NOTE: 13 Amp, 28 VLX.
DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION.
----DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION.
CONTRACTORS:"UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING
THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ."
DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY
FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC.
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-20.2
REV. 0 7-1-09
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electric (110 VACI60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
POWER SOURCE I MANUAL RESET fl 0 I RELAY
ELECTRIC
SNAP-ACTION
SWITCH
CONTACTOR
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
JUNCT ON BOX
IC (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)
ON-OFF L=
SWITCH
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
000276
WIRING SCHEMATIC
S
WIRING SCHEMATIC - RELAY PART NO. 426151 BLACK
RED
ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH BROWN
(SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL
AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION)
RESET POWER
nRED GND
____________________SCREWI 5
SOIL 6
INDICATOR
RE
__________________ L2 NEUTRAL 110 VAC/60HZ
-
[_L1HOT
CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
rMANUAL RESET RELAY I I I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
i r - i POWER ON-OFF SWITCH
ELECTRIC TING TO HEATING j L_------------- (PART N. 426151)
- -- - - -
- I TO POWER SUPPLY - 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC
1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC ELEMENT LOAD 220 V/440V
13 Amp, 28 VDC 002450 NOTE:
DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION.
-----DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. .
GAS VALVES: UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL, OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING,
I1OV/60 HZ" OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707, 13708, 12J09, 13710, AND 17643.
DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY
FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC.
- . FIGURE 111
C
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-20.3
7-1-09 REV. 0
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and Power Supply Switch
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
POWER SOURCE
1 1- RELAY
MANUAL RESET
ELECTRIC
SNAP-ACTION
SWITCH r"U"'
UNcT ON BOX'
(NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)
SWITCH OR
THERMOSTAT
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
CONTACTOR
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
WIRING SCHEMATIC
WIRING SCHEMATIC - RELAY PART NO. 426151
:-- BLACK
RED
ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH BROWN (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL - -
AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION)
I RESET POWER I OR INDICAT
DII GND
I RED-F-
AM
I IB 5
[RVEY COIL J 4)
_ Q 12
- -o
S
L2 NEUTRAL
110 VAC/BOHZ
Li HOT
S
I----
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
J CONTACTOR I SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT
MANUAL RESET RELAY I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) r
L I I(PART NO. __I L!151) 1 _._____1 I r4
ELECTRIC RATING
1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC
1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY TO HEATING 13 Amp, 28 VDC ELEMENT LOAD - 220 V/440V
002461
NOTE:
DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION.
---DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION.
CONTRACTORS: "UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE
COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, . 10V/60HZ."
DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY
FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. [eIuJ91PI
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-20.4
REV. 0 7-1-09
NOTES: .
0
S
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-21
7-1-09 REV. 4
WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
(ULC APPROVED ONLY)
Refer to the following notes and wiring diagram for instruction on
wiring the 24 VDC regulated release assembly.
Notes:
To be connected to a nominal 12 VDC or 24 VDC releasing
circuit.
Input power: 450 mA at 12 VDC or 750 mA at 24 VDC.
Solenoid on time: Approximately 50 milliseconds.
Polarization: Observe polarity when connected to a release
circuit; Terminal 4 positive, Terminal 8 negative.
All interconnecting wiring must be 18 AWG minimum.
S1 contact rating: 15A, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC resistive; 1/2A,
125 VDC; 1/4A, 250 VDC; 5A, 120 VAC inductive.
SQL, coil resistance: 28 OHMS +1- 10% at 77 OF (25 °C).
Install the in-line supervisory device SD, across terminals No.
4 and No. 5. Refer to the releasing panel installation instruc-
tions for supervisory device requirements. If an in-line super-
visory device is not required, install jumper J2 across terminals
No. 4 and No. 5.
THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON
ACTUATION OF RELEASE
0
(4)
UL LISTED OR SDX
SUPERVISED
RELEASING
CONTROL UNIT
IN-LINE
SUPERVISORY
DEVICE
(—)
VOLTAGE
TRANSIENT /
SUPPRESSOR
* AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES, SEE S RATINGS
FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S RATINGS.
FIGURE 113
002300
SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 5-22
REV. 4 7-1-09
NOTES:
0
SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 6-1
7-1-09 REV. 3
I
After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE
INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at the
regulated release assembly. The testing information listed in this
section deals with the limitations and parameters of this pre-engi-
neered system. Those individuals responsible for the testing of the
R-102 system must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certifi-
cate in an R-102 training program.
Note: ANSUL AUTOMAN Release must be in the cocked position
before testing manual pull station. Make certain to remove lock bar
before performing pull station testing.
TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION
To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following
steps:
With the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar
from regulated release assembly cable lever.
On pull station, remove break rod from the pull station by
inserting a small screwdriver into slot at bottom of pull knob to
facilitate turning the pull knob. Push slightly on the screwdriver
and turn pull knob clockwise, then the pull knob can be
removed without breaking the glass rod.
NOTICE
Take care in removing the break rod from the
pull station side shields while rotating the break
rod/pull knob assembly.
Pull ring handle on pull station. If the regulated release
assembly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station is
properly installed. If the regulated release assembly does not
trip, remove pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow
cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley
sheave. If this does not correct the problem, there is too much
slack in the line and it must be retightened.
Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever (Part
No. 14995 or 435603) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985).
On pull station, insert the break rod into the two holes toward
the top of the pull knob. Rotate the pull knob counterclockwise.
NOTICE
Take care in snapping in the ends of the break
rod into the pull station side shields while rotat-
ing the entire assembly.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, proceed
to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection
system.
TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
To test each mechanical gas shut-off valve complete the following
steps:
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any
open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or
mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Turn gas line on.
Manually push each air cylinder rod to full "DOWN" position.
The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve does not
trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope
is resting on each pulley elbow sheave. If this does not correct
the problem there may be too much slack in the line and it
should be retightened.
Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu-
tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where
leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain no other
gas leaks exist.
If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full "UP" position.
Recock mechanical gas valve.
Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO
THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will
cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time.
Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain roll
pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot.
Connect visual inspection seals (Part No. 197) on ANSUL type
valves. See Figure 1.
'ECTION
NO. 197)
FIGURE 1
000359
Make certain the regulated release mechanism is cocked with
lock bar in place.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, proceed
to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection
system.
SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 6-2
REV.3 7-1-09
TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES
To test each Electric Gas Shut-off Valve complete the following
steps:
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any
open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or
mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Turn gas line on.
TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH
The procedure for testing a field installed Electric (Snap-Action)
Switch is as follows:
NOTICE
If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached to
system, perform proper test procedure for the
gas valve first, before completing the following
steps.
1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button on
manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). All electrical devices
should be operating at this time.
Make certain electric (snap-action) switch is properly wired.
Make certain all other devices connected to the manual reset
relay are properly wired. Refer to typical wiring diagrams in
Figures 110, 111, 112, and 113 in 'Installation" section.
Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu-
tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where
leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no other gas Kj
leaks exist.
If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress
the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON)
to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve.
Remove lock bar from regulated release mechanism.
CAUTION
4. Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be
actuated.
Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull
station. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod
prior to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED LIGHT
OUT) will de-energize (CLOSE) the electric gas valve, thus
shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen, turn power
source off. Then re-examine all wiring connections for proper
hookup. Refer to Figures 110, 111, 112, and 113 in
"Installation" section for typical wiring diagrams.
If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism
using cocking lever (Part No. 14995 or 435603) and reinstall
lock bar (Part No. 14985). Depress reset button on manual
reset relay (RED LIGHT ON).
Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This
will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, proceed
to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection
system.
2. Remove lock bar.
A1xh11LhI
Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be
actuated.
Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull
station. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod
prior to operating pull station. (If installed, the manual reset
relay will de-energize the electric gas valve,, thus shutting off
the gas line.) All electrically-operated devices predetermined
to shut off or turn on should do so. If this does not occur, turn
power source off and make sure all wiring is properly
connected and retest. Refer to Figures 110, 111, 112, and 113
in "Installation" section for typical wiring diagrams.
If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism
using cocking lever (Part No. 14995 or 435603) and reinstall
lock bar (Part No. 14985). If a manual reset relay is installed,
depress the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will also be
necessary to re-light any pilot lights on the cooking appli-
ances.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached, proceed
to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection
system.
[I
SECTION VI - TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 6-3
7-1-09 REV. 4
0 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM
1. Test detection system by completing the following steps: 4. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the follow-
a. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the ing steps:
"UP" position. a. Raise tension lever to "UP" position and install a properly-
b. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and rated fusible link in the terminal detector.
install a test link (Part No. 15751). See Figure 2. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
(Part No. 14995 or 435603) and insert lock bar (Part No.
14985).
0 0
Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the
way toward termination end of detection run.
TEST LINK Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in.
FIGURE 2 (9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained between the 000363 base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever
c. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. assembly.
For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly NOTICE
toward termination end of detection run. Reset any electrical equipment that may have
For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the been affected by the system actuation.
way toward termination end of detection run. f. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if
d. Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight
"DOWN" position and remove lock bar. stamped on cartridge.
e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector g. Install cartridge into the regulated release mechanism
to simulate automatic actuation, receiver and each regulated actuator receiver. Hand tighten
f. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 4. firmly.
2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check h. Remove the lock bar.
the following components and remedy any disorder as follows: I. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regu-
Check the detector linkage for correct positioning, lated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate
fasteners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No.
Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming. 197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If
Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and system is install in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure
centered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley elbow cover and secure with appropriate hardware or procedure.
deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow.
Make certain that lock bar is removed. CAUTION
Make certain that regulated release mechanism is cocked. I Before installing cover, make certain detection tension I
Make certain that tension lever is in "DOWN" position. I lever is secured in the "DOWN" position to enable auto- I
I matic detection and operation of the ANSUL I 3. Re-test the system by completing the following steps: AUTOMAN Regulated Release. I Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock bar is '
inserted. j. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a
Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the permanent file.
"UP" position.
Install a new test link (Part No. 15751) on the terminal
detector.
Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever to
the "DOWN" position.
Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
maximum clearance between the trip hammer assembly
and the cable lever assembly.
Remove the lock bar.
Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector
to simulate automatic actuation.
S
SECTION VI -TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 6-4
REV. 2 10-1-02
NOTES: S
S
SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 7-1
7-1-98 REV. 1
The recharge information listed in this section deals with the limi- RECHARGE
tations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those mdi- NOTICE viduals responsible for the recharge of the R-1 02 system must be Determine the cause of system discharge and trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R-102 training correct immediately before performing system program. recharge.
For continued fire protection, the R-102 restaurant fire sup- 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN pression system must be recharged immediately after use. regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple-tank sys- assembly. tems are as follows.
CLEANUP PROCEDURES
Although there is no unusual cleanup procedure of ANSULEX or
ANSULEX Low pH agents, due to the alkaline nature of these
agents, they should be cleaned from kitchen surfaces within 24
hours after system discharge. The reaction from the wet chemical
agent on cooking grease or oil produces a foamy bi-product that
can be wiped up with a cloth or sponge. The following procedures
should be followed:
Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel
sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut oft.
Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance electrical
controls have been de-energized to avoid any chance of elec-
trical shock resulting from the cleaning process or from electri-
cally conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue.
Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to
room temperature.
Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain hot
grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent steaming
and/or spattering.
From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the
expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
From tank in mounting bracket or mounting enclosure:
Disconnect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor
inlet line(s).
Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out-
let line(s).
From tank in enclosure: Remove tank.
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank.
Remove each tank adaptor/tube assembly and complete the
following:
Remove 0-ring and inspect for damage.
Clean and coat 0-ring with a good grade of extreme tem-
perature grease and reinstall into adaptor groove. See
Figure 1.
Remove 1/4 in. vent plug.
Clean and inspect for free movement and corrosion.
Replace if necessary.
Reinstall vent plug into adaptor body.
S
The agent is non-toxic; however, food product and cooking
grease/oil that has come in contact with the agent will no
longer be suitable for human consumption and should be dis-
carded.
Sponge up as much of the agent as possible using sponges
or clean rags. Dispose of these sponges or rags in a local san-
itary land fill site in accordance to local authorities. Note: Wear
rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become
irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact
with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water.
Using hot, soapy water and either a clean cloth or sponge,
wipe away all foamy residue and thoroughly scrub all surfaces 6 that have come in contact with the agent. Note: Wear rubber
gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated.
If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with
skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water.
After thoroughly cleaning all affected surfaces, adequately
rinse and allow to completely dry before re-energizing the
equipment.
FIGURE 1
000364
CAUTION
Do not flush pipe with only water or other non-approved
material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading to
possible improper discharge.
Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet chemical
residue. To prepare the system for flushing:
Pour the complete contents of one 32-oz. bottle of ANSUL
Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty
R-102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either
size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3.0 gallon.
Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean water.
Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm
water to bring the fill level to within approximately
1 in. (2.5 cm) from the bottom of the fill opening.
RECHARGE (Continued)
c. Install adaptor/tube assembly and tighten.
7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy-duty
plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 2) or remove each
nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See Figure 3.
If using plastic bags, secure bags and proceed to Step 9.
If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8.
VENT HOLES
NOZZL
FITTIN
HEAVY GAUGE
PLASTIC BAG
FIGURE 2
001739
NOZZLE TIP
AND RETAINER
NOZZLE
BODY
HIGH
-PRESSURE
' PLASTIC
TUBING
1/2 IN. NPT COMPRESSION
FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR
I
SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 7-2
REV. 6 7-1-09
S Using a 1 N nozzle tip and retainer, (Part No. 56930), slide
a length of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) plastic tubing over the rib on the
nozzle tip and secure with a 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) adjustable
hose clamp. See Figure 4. This nozzle tip will be connected
to the nozzle body left installed in the distribution piping.
In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required, large
enough to insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one additional
hole that can be used for venting.
Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors to the
pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure 4.
1 NOZZLE TIP
AND RETAINER RIB ON NOZZLE (PART NO. 56930)
1/2 IN. TUBING
1/2 IN. ADJUSTABLE -
HOSE CLAMP
TUBING X 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION
FITTING/THREADED INSERT-... / ADAPTOR
e. Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings. Tubing
inserts will be required. See Figure 4.
1. Install nozzle/tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge
piping.
-
g. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the pail
cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail.
Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure:
Connect discharge piping and expellant gas line to agent
tank adaptor.
Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN Release Mechanism and insert
lock bar. Refer to Components Section of this manual for
detailed part numbers.
Install LT-30-R Cartridge; hand tighten.
Remove lock bar.
If regulated actuators are included in the system, also
install LT-30-R cartridges in them.
Actuate system via pull station.
Wash out all system nozzles and strainers in warm soapy
water, rinse and return all nozzles and strainers to their
appropriate locations in the discharge piping.
Verify that all nozzle types are correct. Utilizing the Nozzle
Aiming Device, Part No. 431992, ensure that all nozzles are
correctly aimed at the appropriate location on the appli-
ance.
Remove empty tank.
FIGURE 3
001740
8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) OD
plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed 0.062 in.
(1.6 mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures of
at least 90 psi (6.2 bar) expelled during the flushing and blow-
down procedures.
Also required is a container with some means of securing tub-
ing to it such as a five-gallon plastic pail and cover that snaps
onto the pail.
To prepare the plastic tubing:
a. Cut as many tubing lengths as required, making them long
enough to reach the container from each nozzle outlet.
1/2 IN. j I
CONDUIT . -r.J PAIL
NUTS . COVER
FIGURE 4
000367
S
SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 7-3
7-1-09 REV.5
S
[]
RECHARGE (Continued)
Fill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Note: Use a fun-
nel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering the
tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling
instructions.
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 OF to
80 OF (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD
AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing
system malfunction.
Replace bursting disc, Part No. 416974, in adaptor assembly.
Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank.
Replace adaptor/tube assembly and tighten into place. Return
and secure each tank in regulated release assembly and
mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas and dis-
tribution piping and/or as required.
Raise tension lever to UP" position.
Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part
No. 14995 or 435603) and install lock bar (Part No. 14985).
Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly
and each regulated actuator assembly as required.
ZL CAUTION
Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system
may be actuated.
Install properly-rated fusible links in all detectors except the
terminal detector.
NOTICE
If actuation was caused by a fire situation, all
fusible links must be replaced.
Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector.
Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
Remove the lock bar.
Using wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to
simulate automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not actu-
ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the 'Testing
Detection System" portion of the 'Testing and
Placing In Service" section, Page 6-3, of this
manual.
After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP"
position.
Install properly-rated, ANSUL approved, fusible link in terminal
detector.
Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock bar
(Part No. 14985).
Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each bracket.
Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position.
Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make
certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum
of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip
hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly.
NOTICE
If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to
a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension
lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8-
1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and
repeat Steps 25 and 26.
Remove lock bar.
Manually test the regulated release mechanism by operating
the remote manual pull station.
Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock
bar.
Reset all devices which were affected by the system actua-
tion. Refer to "Resetting" section, Page 7-3 and 7-4.
RESETTING
Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station
Metal Stamped Style (Part No. 4835 and 54011)
Reset each remote manual pull station by completing the following
steps:
If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break
glass rod.
If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass
from station.
Press and position ring handle in proper location against cover
and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No. 4834)
through stud and handle.
Tighten set screw into stud.
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge
Replacement," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5.
Molded Composite Style (Part No. 415255)
Position pull ring in vertical groove of pull station cover.
Insert break-away seal, Part No. 79029, through holes in cover
and snap in place.
Molded Composite Style with Side Shields (Part No. 434618
and 435960)
If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass
from station.
Insert the break rod into the two holes toward the top of the
pull knob.
Pull the excess slack back into the ANSUL AUTOMAN
Release. This will pull the pull knob assembly in place.
NOTICE
Take care in snapping in the ends of the break
rod into the pull station side shields while rotat-
ing the entire assembly.
Hold the pull knob assembly against the faceplate. Rotate the
pull knob assembly counterclockwise until the break rod and
pull knob snap in place.
Snap the PULL tab onto the pull knob so it is legible.
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge
Replacement," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5.
SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 7-4
REV.3 7-1-09
RESETTING (Continued) S
Resetting Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve Resetting Electrical Gas Shut-Off Valve
Reset each mechanical gas shut-off valve by completing the fol- Reset each electric gas shut-off valve by completing the following
lowing steps: steps:
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the
gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open
flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani-
cal devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Remove side cover from gas valve housing.
Extend air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. Air cylinder, is
located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure.
Recock gas valve by pulling valve stem up so pin in stem
engages in cocking lever.
Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO
THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will
cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any fur-
ther.
If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time.
Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On ANSUL type
valve, make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of
the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal (Part
No. 197).
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge
Replacement" and complete steps 1 through 5.
Resetting Electrical Switch (Snap-Action)
Reset the electric (snap-action) switch by completing the following
steps:
Make certain the power source is on.
Electric (snap-action) switch is reset automatically when the
regulated release mechanism is recocked.
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment" and complete steps 1 through 5.
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the
gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open
flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani-
cal devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Make certain the power source is on.
Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on). Gas
valve will resume its normal operating (open) position.
Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This
will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
further.
If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time.
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment" and complete steps 1 through 5.
Resetting Pressure Switch
Reset the pressure switch by completing the following:
Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover. The
pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right side of
the regulated release enclosure. An audible click will be heard
to verify the pressure switch has resumed its normal (non-
actuated) condition.
If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace-
ment" and complete steps 1 through 5.
REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE
To complete the recharge and resetting procedures:
Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge.
Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight
stamped on cartridge.
Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock
bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into the
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
receiver and hand tighten.
Remove lock bar.
Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator
assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and lower
cover hole and secure.
CAUTION
Before installing cover, make certain detection tension
lever is secured in the "DOWN" position to enable auto-
matic detection and operation of the ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release.
Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a per-
manent file.
fl
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-1
7-1-09 REV. 8
S
El
I
The maintenance information listed in this section deals with the
limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those
individuals responsible for the maintenance of the R-102 system
must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an R-102
training program.
Maintenance is required semi-annually. At the 12 year interval,
along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be
hydro-tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested.
Prior to performing the required maintenance steps, verify that the
R-102 system protection is designed and installed correctly for the
existing appliance and ventilation system configuration. If not,
make corrections as required.
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
Semi-annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and
multiple-tank systems are as follows.
NOTICE
Under certain circumstances hood and duct
cleaning operations may render the fire
suppression system ineffective due to a coating
of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip-
ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning
service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended that the R-102 system be
completely inspected and serviced by an
authorized ANSUL distributor immediately
following any such cleaning operations.
Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
assembly.
Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated
release mechanism. See Figure 1.
FIGURE 1
000321
Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each
regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and
set aside in a safe location.
Check to make certain the actuation line used to connect the
regulated actuator assembly(s) to the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly is connected to the high pressure
side (right side) of the cartridge receiver in the ANSUL
AUTOMAN and that it is intact, with all fittings securely tight-
ened. This includes any 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings used
to connect to the air cylinder for the ANSUL mechanical gas
valve.
squ1l[.]
If the actuation line leaks pressure, the regulated actuator
assembly(s) may not operate. A severe leak can render
the entire system inoperable.
To check for leaks in the actuation line, a hand held or electric
vacuum pump may be used:
Disconnect the actuation line from the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release cartridge receiver and connect the pump
to the line.
The pump should pull a vacuum to 20 inches of mercury, as
shown on the gauge. Leaks should not exceed 5 inches of
mercury loss within a 30 second time frame.
If the gauge indicates a leak in the line, examine for loose
connections or damage. Repair or replace as needed.
If leakage is not due to piping, disassemble the pneumatic
actuator assembly(s) in the regulated actuator(s) and
inspect the actuator and the 0-ring in the actuator. Repair
or replace as needed.
Note: Vacuum pumps can be obtained from automotive
parts/supply stores.
Alternate Test Method:
The actuation line can also be pressurized with either CO2 or
N2 from a cartridge or with dry air, CO2, or N2 from a larger
cylinder.
Cock the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly
and carefully insert Lock Bar, Part No. 14985. See Figure 8.
Make certain expellant gas line hose and/or pipe from the
regulator in the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release is
disconnected from agent storage tanks.
Connect Regulator Test Kit, Part No. 56972, to one of the
expellant gas line hoses and securely cap the remaining
hose or pipe. See Figure 10.
Verify that no cartridges are installed in the ANSUL
AUTOMAN or the regulated actuator assembly(s).
To verify operation of the regulated actuator assembly(s),
Pressure Adaptor, Part No. 427560, can be used to
connect to a pressurized CO2 or N2 cylinder, instead of
using a CO2 or N2 cartridge.
Note: The pressure adaptor assembly comes with a 1/4 in.
NPT pipe plug that is required to be installed in the side of the
adaptor.
Install a suitable 1/4 inch air pressure quick connect fitting
(supplied by others) to the bottom of the adaptor.
Install and hand tighten the adaptor to the cartridge
receiver and securely attach the corresponding connector
from the gas cylinder hose assembly.
With the valve on the regulator test kit closed, remove the
lock bar and operate the remote cable operated pull station
to operate the regulated release.
Open the pressure cylinder valve to verify that the regu-
lated actuator assembly(s) has operated properly and the
air cylinder has unlatched the ANSUL mechanical gas
valve, if used.
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-2
REV. 4 7-1-09
Make certain that each tank is filled with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
Suppressant. Fill level to be ONLY to the level indicated in the
"Installation" section. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed
filling tolerances.
Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank collar for
nicks, burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat 0-ring with a
good grade of extreme temperature grease. See Figure 3.
Remove 1/4 in. vent plug and clean and inspect for free move-
ment and corrosion (replace if necessary). Reinstall vent plug.
Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away
from tank. Clean seating surface and return adaptor/tube
assembly to each tank. Tighten securely.
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
Once regulated actuator and gas valve operation is veri-
fied, close the valve on the pressurized cylinder, if used,
and open the valve on the regulator test kit to relieve any
residual pressure.
Note: Although only required at 12 year intervals, the regula-
tor in the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release can also be
verified. See Maintenance steps on page 8-6.
Re-cock the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release and
remove the spent cartridge or pressure adaptor from the
cartridge receiver.
I. If there were leaks in the actuation line or in the 1/8 inch
copper gas tubing for the air cylinder(s), re-tighten the
fittings or replace damaged components.
m. If the cartridge puncture pin in the regulated actuator(s) did
not fully extend, dismantle the actuator and inspect compo-
nents of the actuator assembly.
Once the pneumatic actuator is disassembled, remove
the actuator piston assembly and check the interior walls
of the actuator body for signs of damage or corrosion.
Check the 0-ring for elasticity or cuts. Replace, if neces-
sary. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good grade of extreme
temperature silicone grease and reinstall.
Re-assemble the actuator assembly(s), and reconnect all
actuation and all expellant piping or hose.
Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release
mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for
elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat
gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature
grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s).
From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the
expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the
expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line.
Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
outlet line.
From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. Keep in upright position
to avoid spilling the agent.
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright
position to avoid spilling the agent.
Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from each tank. See
Figure 2.
FIGURE 2
000291
SILVER SIDE OF DISC
AWAY FROM TANK
ORIN<T
FIGURE 3
000364
Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and
secure.
Carefully assemble and wrench tighten all expellant gas and
agent distribution piping.
Remove blow-off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow-off cap
and replace if deteriorated. On older style metal blow-off caps,
make certain spring clip rotates freely on cap. On newer metal
blow-off caps, make certain integral 0-ring is intact and
undamaged. Replace cap(s) if necessary.
NOTICE
Rubber blow-off caps that have been installed in
the system for one year or more must be
replaced.
Verify that all nozzle types are correct. Check all nozzles to
ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and have
a thin coating of clean silicone grease across the orifice.
Note: Do not allow silicone grease to enter nozzle orifice.
Note: If there is any evidence of cooking grease or other
residue in the nozzles or distribution piping or agent or agent
residue in the distribution piping, the entire piping network
must be inspected and thoroughly cleaned. Portions of piping
that cannot be thoroughly cleaned must be replaced.
Utilizing the Nozzle Aiming Device, Part No. 431992, ensure
that all nozzles are correctly aimed at the appropriate location
on the appliance. Reinstall blow-off caps.
1 17. Remove the lock bar and manually test the regulated release
assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. Check
pull station cover for damage or wear. Replace cover if cable
has worn a groove in the cover as deep as the diameter of the
cable. If flexible conduit is used in installation, check conduit
for damage, cuts and sharp bends.
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-3
7-1-09 REV. 5
S SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
18. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
(Part No. 14995 or 435603). See Figure 4.
Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap-action)
switches:
With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready posi-
tion, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is
working properly, there should be an audible click.
With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the
lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click.
If an audible click is heard in the fired position several
adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can
be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed
up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this
doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the
switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the
switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final
adjustment can be made by removing the snap action
switch and bending the lever slightly.
After adjustments, repeat Steps a. and b. Then, recock
ANSUL AUTOMAN and insert lock bar.
fl
19. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 5.
TENSION LEVER
IN "UP" POSITION
FIGURE 5
000322
Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector.
Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 6.
TENSION LEVER
IN "DOWN" POSITION
FIGURE 4 FIGURE 6
001096 000320
Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate
automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of 'Testing
Detection System" in Testing and Placing in
Service," Section 6, Page 6-3.
After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP"
position.
Remove and destroy all existing fusible links from the terminal
and series detector brackets and replace with properly-rated
ANSUL approved, fusible links in accordance with NFPA 17A.
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-4
REV. 6 7-1-09
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
Inspect wire rope at all detector locations, pulley elbows,
pulley tee and at ANSUL AUTOMAN release. If wire rope
shows signs of wear or fraying, replace entire length.
Lower the tension lever to "DOWN" position.
Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock
bar.
Inspect the base of the wire rope locking clamp to make
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a
maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of
the trip hammer locking clamp assembly and the cable lever
assembly. See Figure 7.
TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY ri LOCKING CLAMP
Test electric switches and electric gas valves by completing
steps on Page 6-2 in Section 6, Testing and Placing In
Service."
Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by
referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting
Procedures," Section 7.
Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if
weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped
on cartridge.
1. 39. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock
bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regu-
lated release mechanism and each regulated actuator
receiver(s) and hand tighten.
11 40. Remove lock bar.
114 IN. (6.4 mm) Make certain tension lever is in the "DOWN" position after MINIMUM completing all tests. Failure to put the tension lever in the T 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm)
MAXIMUM "DOWN" position will cause the system to not operate
N. i i automatically.
CABLE LEVER ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 7
000329
NOTICE
If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or
3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" posi-
tion, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-
12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps
24 and 26.
For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage and properly position
L in each bracket all the way toward termination end of detection
If a mechanical gas valve is installed, begin the test procedure
by removing both side covers.
At the regulated release, push the air cylinder rod fully down.
The gas valve should operate.
Pull the air cylinder rod to its fully extended position.
Re-cock the gas valve by pulling the valve stem up until the pin
in the stem engages the cocking lever.
Reinstall side covers on the gas valve and connect the visual
indication seal.
41. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator,
insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover and
box, and secure.
42. If system contains an Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining
Cable Assembly, also perform the following steps:
Carefully pull or push out the appliance and verify that the
Restraining Cable limits the travel of the appliance and
prevents the application of any pull force or bending stress
on the Agent Distribution Hose or hose-to-pipe connec-
tions.
Check the Restraining Cable to verify it is not frayed and is
securely fastened to the appliance and the wall or restrain-
ing location.
Check the hose and hose fittings and verify that the hose
remains in a vertical natural loop with no noticeable fatigue
at hose end couplings, no hose twists, no hose kinking or
sharp bends. -
Check the outer hose covering for 6igns of damage, check-
ing, tears, or wear. If any of these signs are observed,
replace the hose.
Return the appliance to its normal operating position.
Again, check the hose and hose fittings to verify that the
hose does not have sharp bends, and is not kinked,
twisted, or caught on anything behind the appliance. If any
of these conditions exist, the hose and/or hose connections
will require installation modifications.
With the appliance in its normal operating position, check
the hose bend to make certain the bend is not less than a
3 in. (7.6 cm) bend radius (6 in. (15.2 cm) diameter). If less,
replace hose.
Verify that the appliance is returned to its original desired
location. Failure to do so may result in undue stress and
fatigue of the hose and hose connections.
43. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit
and/or in a permanent file.
1~
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-5
7-1-09 REV. 5
S
S
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
In addition to performing all the steps necessary for Semi-Annual
Maintenance, disconnect the agent discharge piping from the
storage tank outlet(s) and verify that the agent distribution piping
is not obstructed.
At least annually, use dry air or nitrogen and blow through the
agent distribution piping with the nozzle blow-off caps
removed, verifying that dry air or nitrogen is discharging at
each nozzle location.
If nozzles show signs of cooking grease migration into the
orifice of the nozzle, or if there is evidence of agent
residue in the nozzle(s) or the inlet to the agent distribu-
tion piping, some or all of the piping may require disman-
tling to verify that the piping is not obstructed.
At least annually, all rubber nozzle blow-off caps must be
replaced.
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
In addition to performing all of the steps necessary for semi-annual
and annual maintenance, the following twelve-year maintenance
procedures for single, double, and multiple-tank systems must be
performed.
NOTICE
Under certain circumstances hood and duct clean-
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the
R-102 system be completely inspected and
serviced by an authorized ANSUL distributor
immediately following any such cleaning oper-
ations.
At twelve-year intervals, the liquid agent tank(s)
must be hydrostatically tested and refilled with a
fresh charge of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
Suppressant. The date of manufacture is stamped
on the bottom of the agent tank or on the tank label.
Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
assembly.
2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated
release mechanism. See Figure 8.
LOCK BAR
PROPERLY
INSTALLED
FIGURE 8
000321
Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each
regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and
set aside in a safe location.
CAUTION
Do not reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be
actuated.
Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release
mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for
elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat
gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature
grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s).
From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas piping or
hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas
piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line.
Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
outlet line.
From tank in enclosure: Remove tank.
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright
position to avoid spilling the agent.
Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove.
Safety glasses should be worn during transfer operations
of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid
contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush imme-
diately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation persists,
contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken inter-
nally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and
contact a physician.
Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic
container, and flush tank with clear water.
At this point, each liquid agent tank, including the 1/4 in.
gas hose assembly, must be HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED to
330 psi (26.6 bar). Refer to "Hydrostatic Test Instructions,"
F-7602, for test adaptors and instructions.
NOTICE
DO NOT hydrostatically test a red painted mild
steel agent storage tank. Instead, replace the
tank with a new stainless steel tank shipping
assembly (3-Gallon, Part No. 429862, or 1.5
Gallon, Part No. 429864).
Verify date stamped on cartridge. The cartridge must also be
hydrotested at intervals not greater than 12 years. (European
cartridges are not refillable, therefore cannot be hydrotested
and refilled. They must be discarded).
If cartridge date indicates the need for hydrotesting, the
cartridge must be bled down through normal ANSUL
AUTOMAN release operation, returned to ANSUL for credit (or
hydrotested by properly trained and ANSUL Authorized
cartridge refilling stations), and replaced with a charged,
replacement cartridge.
S ing operations may render your fire suppression
system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning
chemical left on the detection equipment or
mishandling of the system by cleaning service
personnel.
S
FIGURE 9
000369
For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union.
Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe
cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during
test. See Figure 10.
FIGURE 10
000370
Pressure Switch: If an ANSUL suppliedpressure switch is
still in good operatingi condition, it should remain connected
as part of system maintenance test.
NOTICE
For multiple-tank systems, one test kit (Part
No. 56972) is required for each regulator in
the system.
S
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-6
REV. 5 7-1-09
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
NOTICE
Cartridge bleed down can be used to verify
pneumatic accessories operation.
If system contains an Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining
Cable Assembly, a hydrostatic test is required at 220 psi (15.2
bar) for hose assembly.
The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. Check
the date code stamped on the regulator body to determine if
the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing (see data code
table). If regulator does not require testing, proceed to step 12.
Flow test the regulator(s) per the following:
Date Code Table
Code Code
Month Code Year UL541L UL74FF
January A 1981 K
February B 1982 L
March C 1983 M
April D 1984 N
May E 1985 P
June F 1986 R
July G 1987 S
August H 1988 T
September J 1989 U
October K 1990 V
November L 1991 W
December M 1992 Y
1993 Z
1994 A
1995 B
1996 C
1997 D
.1998 E
1999 F
2000 G
2001 H
2002 J
2003 K
2004 L
2005 M E
2006 F
2007 G
2008 H
2009 I
2010 J
2011 K
2012
2013 M
2014 N
2015 0
a. Regulated Release Mechanism
For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas pipe or hose from
tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose.
See Figure 9. S
I
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-7
7-1-09 REV.5
S
I
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
b. Regulated Actuator
For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank.
Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See
Figure 11.
FIGURE 11
000371
For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union.
Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe
cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during
test. See Figure 12.
FIGURE 12
000372
NOTICE
Make certain valve is closed on regulator
test kit or pressure will escape before test can
be performed.
Install either a nitrogen or CO2 cartridge into release mech-
anism and each regulated actuator provided with the
system. (Cartridge should be conditioned to approximately
70 OF (21 °C) before test.)
NOTICE
Before continuing with Step d, make certain
valve on test kit is closed.
Remove lock bar and operate remote manual pull station to
actuate the regulated release and supply pressure to each
test kit.
Two styles of regulators are used with the R-102 release
mechanisms. The diaphragm style (see Figure 13) was
used in R-102 systems up to approximately 1988. The
piston style (see Figure 13) has been used since 1988.
Each style requires a slightly different flow test procedure.
Use the appropriate flow test procedure as stated in Step
DIAPHRAGM STYLE PISTON STYLE
(USED UNTIL 1988) (USED AFTER 1988)
FIGURE 13
002301
Flow test each regulator by completing the following steps:
Diaphragm Style - The correct pressure should read 90 to
110 psi (6.2 to 7.6 bar) with the valve on the test kit closed
and 80 psi (5.5 bar) with the valve on the test kit opened.
Keep the valve opened to completely empty the pressure
cartridge after pressure test has been verified.
Piston Style - Open the valve on the regulator test kit. The
correct pressure should read between 95 to 125 psi (6.6 to
8.6 bar). Keep the valve open to completely empty the pres-
sure cartridge.
If necessary, continue to flow test at each additional regu-
lated actuator. Test each regulated actuator by repeating
Step e.
Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No.
14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985).
Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mecha-
nism and each regulated actuator.
Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each regu-
lated actuator.
I. If regulator test was not successful, replace regulator.
Reconnect all expellant gas lines.
Reset all additional equipment that was operated by
release mechanism.
15. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks,
burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat 0-ring with a good
grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain bursting
disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See
Figure 14.
Ii
FIGURE 14
000364
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-8
REV. 2 7-1-09
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 23. Raise the tension lever to UP" position. See Figure 16
Examine pick-up tube for signs of damage or corrosion.
Replace assembly if needed.
Refill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only
new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Note: Use a
funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering
the tank.
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 OF to
80 OF (16 °C to 27 "C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD
AGENT. Refer to the "Installation" section, Page 5-2.1 for
maximum fill heights for ANSULEX Low pH agent storage
tanks. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in agent
entering gas hose and regulator, potentially causing
system malfunction.
II9
(I
TENSION LEVER
IN "UP" POSITION
Clean seating surface and return each adaptor/tube assembly
to tank. Firmly tighten.
NOTICE
Do not reinstall any tank at this time.
Remove blow-off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow-off cap
and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow-off caps, make
certain spring clip rotates freely on cap.
NOTICE
Rubber blow-off caps that have been
installed in the system for one year or more
must be replaced.
Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking
grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease
on the orifice. Reinstall blow-off caps.
Remove lock bar and manually test the regulated release
assembly by operating the remote manual pull station.
Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
(Part No. 14995 or 435603). See Figure 15.
FIGURE 15
000320
FIGURE 16
000362
Install test link (Part No.15751) in terminal detector.
Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 17.
TENSION LEVER
IN DOWN' POSITION
I
FIGURE 17
001096
Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate
automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of 'Testing
Detection System". in 'Testing and Placing in
Service," Section 6.
After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP"
position.
Remove and destroy all existing fusible links from the terminal
and series detector brackets and replace with properly-rated
ANSUL approved, fusible links in accordance with NFPA 17A.
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-9
7-1-09 REV. 0
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
Lower tension lever to "DOWN' position. 40.
Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock bar.
Inspect the base of the wire rope locking clamp to make
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a
maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of
the trip hammer locking clamp assembly and the cable lever
assembly. See Figure 18. I
Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regu-
lated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fasteners
or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each
upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is installed
in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with
appropriate hardware or procedure.
TRIP HAMMER I1 LOCKING ASSEMBLY CLAMP
1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)
MINIMUM
3/8 IN. (9.5 mm)
MAXIMUM
TRIP
HAMMER
BASE
S
FIGURE 18
000029
NOTICE
If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or
3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to UP"
position, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-
12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat
Steps 29 and 31.
Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket.
Make certain additional devices have operated as intended.
Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by
referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting
Procedures," Section 7.
Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket and
secure.
Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping
unions as required. Wrench tighten.
Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and
weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or
more, below weight stamped on cartridge.
Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock
bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regu-
S lated release mechanism and each regulated actuator
receiver(s) and hand tighten.
P. 39. Remove lock bar.
Before installing cover, make certain tension lever is in the
"DOWN" position after completing all tests. Failure to put
the tension lever in the "DOWN" position will cause the
system to not operate automatically.
41. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag
attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file.
SECTION VIII - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 8-10
REV.O 7-1-09
NOTES: S
0
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-1
7-1-09 REV. 6
0 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE
Note: System options do not cover all conceivable/acceptable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show the
most common type arrangement for multiple systems, Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non-manifolding, 3-tank sys-
tems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, 3.0 gallon tanks and 5 flow,
1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and 6 flow systems when appropriate.
Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen
Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required
1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429)
6-11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435)
12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
16-22 2 Manifold 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release - Double (423493)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
17-22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
1,22-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release - Double (423493)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
23-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) •
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
28-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release N/A Double (423493)
(Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tanks
34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423435)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491)
Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435)
3.0 gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (42349 1)
Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491)
Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
• 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
* Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system.
If tanks are manifolded, only a *double tank nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
If tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
LT-20-R (423429)
(2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
S
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-2
REV.5 10-1-02
SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued)
o. Total Tank Type of
Flow No.* Quantity System
50-55 5 Multiple
Tvoe of Hardwa"e
3.0 Gal. Reg. Release
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Reg. Actuator
Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
Carbon Dioxide
Cartridge Required
101-30 (423443)
N/A
Nitrogen
Cartridge Required
Double (423493)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
S
50-55 5
(Optional)
56-60 6
61-66 6
Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
101-20 (423441)
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)**
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
LT-30-R (423435)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
Double (423493)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
Double (423493)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
67-71 - 7
67-71 7
(Optional)
Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release
(2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
(2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
Multiple Remote Mechanical Release
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
.5 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
101-10 (423439)
N/A
101-10 (423439)
101-30 (423443)
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
101-20 (423441)` LT-30-R (423435)
LT-30-R (423435)
(2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
72-77 7 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441)
(2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A
(2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
72-77 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)**
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)
Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system.
If tanks are manifolded, Only a double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Fart No 423493) can be used.
It tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge Part I, o. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Fart No. 423493) can be used
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-30-R (423435)
11
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-3
10-1-02 REV. 5
Carbon Dioxide
Type of Hardware Cartridge Required
1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
(2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A
(2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)
1.5 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
C SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued)
Total Tank Type of
Flow No.* Quantity System
78-82 8 Multiple
78-82 8 Multiple
(Optional)
Nitrogen
Cartridge Required
LT-30-R (423435)
(2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
(2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A
Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A
(3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439)
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
1.5 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)
83-88 8
83-88 8
(Optional)
S
89-99 9
89-93 9
(Optional)
LT-30-R (423435)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
N/A
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-30-R (423435)
S
94-99 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)
Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. System and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system.
** If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
If tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-30-R (423435)
Carbon Dioxide
Cartridge Required
101-10 (423439)
N/A
101-20 (423441)
101-10 (423439)
10130 (423443)
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
101-30 (423443)***
Nitrogen
Cartridge Required
N/A
(3) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-30-R (423435)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
101-10 (423439) N/A
N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
(2)101-30 (423443) (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-4
REV. 7 10-1-02
SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued)
Total Tank Type of
Flow No.* Quantity System Tvoe of Hardware
100-110 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release
(3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
(3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
1.5 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release
(Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
(2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box
(2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
1.5 Gal. Additional Tank
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
LT-A-101-30 (423491)
105-110 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439)
(Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)**
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)***
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'-
3.0 Gal. Additional Tank
Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow nuniers for a 3.0 gal. system.
If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (art No. 4234931 can be used.
II tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
Options are available up to a maximum of 15 tanks. Contact ANSUL Technical Services Departmeit for detailed information.
0
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-5
7-1-09 REV.6
0 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX
Part No. Description Part No, Description
429853
(ULC
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release Shipping Assembly 418054 OEM Regulated Electric Release Shipping Assembly
Also) Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure Solenoid and Switch
1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket
429856 Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN
Regulated Release Shipping Assembly 79493 OEM Regulated Mechanical Release Shipping
Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Assembly
Solenoid and Switch in Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket
429850 Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly 418691 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
(ULC Includes: Actuator and Regulator in Includes: Actuator and Regulator
Also) Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure Hose
Bracket
429870 Stainless Steel Mounting Box Shipping Assembly
(ULC Includes: Stainless Steel Mounting Box 429878 3.0 Gallon Bracket Assembly
Also) (Bracket Only)
429872 Two Tank Enclosure Shipping Assembly 433485 Remote Release Assembly
(ULC
Also)
Includes: Two (2) Expellant Gas Hoses
Two (2) Grommets 418522 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
Stainless Steel Mounting Box Includes: Actuator and Regulator
Hose
429859 24 VDC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly
(ULC) Includes: 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN Il-C 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly Release Mechanism in Stainless Steel
Box 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly
430299 •Mounting
3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly
including: 56972 Regulator Test Kit
429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly Includes: Gauge, Hose and Valve Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 79694 1.5 Gallon (5.8 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH
430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly Liquid Fire Suppressant
including
429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 79372 3.0 Gallon (11.6 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH
429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly Liquid Fire Suppressant
430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly 423429 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (TC/DOT) including:
429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly 423435 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (TC/DOT)
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping 423493 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double-Tank)
Assembly including: (TC/DOT)
429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly
429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 423491 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30) (TC/DOT)
430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping 423439 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (TC/DOT)
Assembly including:
429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 15850 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (DOT)
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
423441 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-20) (TC/DOT)
430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping
Assembly including: 423443 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101 -30) (TC/DOT)
429872 Two Tank Mounting Box Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 428440 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (European)
430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping Assembly 428441 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (European)
including: I •
429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Assembly 428446 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double Tank)
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (European)
428442 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-1 01-30)
(European)
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-6
REV. 7 7-1-09
SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)
Part No. Description
428443 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (European)
428445 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-20) (European)
428444 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-30) (European)
428948 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (Australian)
426553 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (Australian)
426563 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double Tank)
(Australian)
426555 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30)
(Australian)
419347 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W)
Includes: 25 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336)
25 Blow-Off Caps
419345 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1/2N)
Includes: 9 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334)
9 Blow-Off Caps
419346 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 N)
Includes: 25 1 N Nozzles (Part No. 419335)
25 Blow-Off Caps
419349 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N)
Includes: 9 3N Nozzles (Part No. 419338) -
9 Blow-Off Caps
419348 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W)
Includes: 25 2W Nozzles (Part No. 419337)
25 Blow-Off Caps
419350 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230)
Includes: 25 230 Nozzles (Part No. 419339)
25 Blow-Off Caps
419351 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245)
Includes: 25245 Nozzles (Part No. 419340)
25 Blow-Off Caps
419352 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260)
Includes: 9 260 Nozzles (Part No. 419341)
9 Blow-Oft Caps
418353 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290)
Includes: 9 290 Nozzles (Part No. 419342)
9 Blow-Oft Caps
419354 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2120)
Includes: 9 2120 Nozzles (Part No. 419343)
9 Blow-Oft Caps
419344 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 F)
Includes: 9 1 F Nozzles (Part No. 419333)
9 Blow-Oft Caps
435672 Stainless Steel Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 N)
Includes: 1 Blow-Off Cap (Part No. 77676)
432527 Stainless Steel Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W)
Includes: 1 Blow-Off Cap (Part No. 77676)
419385 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly
Includes: 9 Swivel Adaptors (Part No. 418569)
Part No. Description
423572 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly
Includes: 25 Swivel Adaptors (Part No. 418569)
77695 Blow-Oft Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare)
Includes: 50 Blow-Off Caps (Part No. 77676)
77411 Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
Includes: 12 Blow-Off Caps (Part No. 77676)
433208 CB Metal Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 Blow-Oft Caps (Part No. 432153)
434707 CB Stainless Steel Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 Blow-Off Caps (Part No. 435224)
551530 Metal Blow-Oft Cap 0-Ring Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 0-Rings (Part No. 550625)
417911 In-Line Burst Disc Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 Burst Discs (Part No. 416970)
p25627 1/4 in. Check Valve
551265 Nozzle Aiming Device
435547 Series Detector Package ("Scissor")
435548 Series Detector, Pack of 25 (Scissor")
435546 Terminal Detector Package ('Scissor")
Includes: Test Link
415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly
(Socket End) - to 700 OF (371 "C)
Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670)
423251 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly
(Compression End) - to 700 OF (371 °C)
Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 423250)
427929 Pulley Tee
15821 Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m))
79653 Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m))
24919 Stop Sleeve Package
Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves (Part No. 26317)
p 550122 Oval Sleeve Package
Includes: 100 Oval Sleeves (Part No.4596)
436063 Conduit Offset Shipping Assembly
Includes: 6 Conduit Offsets (Part No. 435961)
78196 1/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 78195)
77285 3/8 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77284)
77287 1/2 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77286)
77289 3/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77288)
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-6.1
7-1-09 REV.5
S
SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)
Part No. Description
79149 1/4 in. "Compression-Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals"
(Part No. 79148)
79151 3/8 in. "Compression-Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals"
(Part No. 79150)
79147 1/2 in. "Compression-Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals"
(Part No. 79146)
79153 1/2 in. "Compression-Seal" EMT Conduit Adaptor
Package
Includes: 24 "Compression-Seals"
(Part No. 79152)
423253 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly
Includes: 6 Hood Seals
436228 Reducing Coupling
435603 Short Handle Cocking Lever
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
435790 Short Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Bar
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
14995 Long Handle Cocking Lever
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
15618 Long Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Bar
(Mechanical/Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN)
26310 Cocking Lever (ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C)
416018 Cocking Lever (Mechanical Gas Valve)
14985 Lock Bar
13707 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve - 3/4 in.
13708 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve - 1 in.
550360 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve - 1 1/4 in.
13709 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve - 1 1/2 in.
13710 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve - 2 in.
550363 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve —2 1/2 in.
17643 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve —3 in.
Part No. Description
423879 Two Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT),
Mounting Hardware
423880 Three Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
Includes: 3 Electric Switches (SPDT),
Mounting Hardware
423881 Four Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
Includes: 4 Electric Switches (SPDT),
Mounting Hardware
428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit
Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 3/4 in.
Gas Shut-oft Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 1 in.
Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 1 1/4 in.
Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 1 1/2 in.
Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve in.
Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve —2 1/2 in.
Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 3 in.
Gas Shut-oft Equipment
Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly
Includes: 50 ft (15.2 m) of Wire Rope
Break Rod Package
Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834)
(Replacement)
Trim Rings (Pack of 10)
Flexible Conduit - 500 ft (152.4 m)
Flexible Conduit —500 ft (152.4 m)
Includes: 500 ft (152.4 m) of Wire Rope
Flexible Conduit Strain Relief
Includes: 50 Strain Reliefs
Flexible Conduit Inserts
Includes: 50 Inserts
16 in. (41 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose
20 in. (51 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose
24 in. (61 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose
42 in. (107 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose
Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining Cable Kit
55598
55601
55604
55607
55610
25937
25938
15733
434618
435960
24915
427074
434525
435959
435979
L 434347
426151 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 31809 S Includes: Relay - Manual Reset 32335
423878 One Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit 32336
Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT), 430815 Mounting Hardware 435982
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-6.2
REV. 3 7-1-09
fl SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)
Part No. Description
434455 Henny Penny Fryer Nozzle Kit
423429 Recharge Equipment
Includes: LT-20-R Cartridge
423435 Recharge Equipment
Includes: LT-30-R Cartridge
423493 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Double System Cartridge
423491 Recharge Equipment
Includes: LT-A-101-30 Cartridge
423439 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 101-10 Cartridge
423441 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 101-20 Cartridge
423443 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 101-30 Cartridge
79372 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 3.0 Gallon (11.4 L) Container of
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
Suppressant
79694 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 1.5 Gallon (5.7 L) Container of
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
Suppressant
417911 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor Bursting
Discs
77695 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 50 Blow-Off Caps
24916 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 10 Test Links (Part No. 1.5751)
415739 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Fusible Link 165 OF (74 °C)
415740 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Fusible Link 212 OF (100 °C)
415744 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 280 OF (138 °C)
(Part No. 415741)
415745 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 360 oF (182 °C)
(Part No. 415742)
415746 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 450 OF (232 °C)
(Part No. 415743)
Part No. Description
73867 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 25 Fusible Links 500 OF (260 °C)
(Part No. 56816)
79651 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Bracket - "Scissor"
415817 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Detector Linkage - "Scissor"
14985 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Lock Bar
14995 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Cocking Lever
26310 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Cocking Lever for
ANSUL AUTOMAN Il-C
15618 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Cocking Lever and Lock Bar Assembly
15240 Recharge Equipment
Includes: 500 OF (260 °C) Exhaust Duct
Thermometer
197 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Lead and Wire Seal
418087 Recharge Equipment
Includes: Installation Manual
0
S
"ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
I]
14 (ORDEI
'TE
16
S
S
18
000373
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-7
7-1-09 REV. 4
0
Figure
N. Description
- Regulated Release Shipping Assembly
1 Mounting Box
2 Basic Release wlRegulator
Basic Release w/Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator
3 Self-Tapping Screw
4 Spacer
5 Tension Spring
6 Lever and Bracket Assembly
7 Machine Screw
8 Lockwasher
9 Hex Nut
10 Caution Label
11 Gasket
12 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly
LT-30-R/1 01-20 (Ordered Separately)
Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately)
13 Safety Shipping Cap
14 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately)
15 Hose Assembly
16 Enclosure Cover (Includes Label)
17 Solenoid Assembly
18 Electric Snap-Action Switch
19 Cover Screw
20 Speed Nut
1,21 Set Screw
Mechanical
Part No.
429853
419293
79140
71342
76555
79094
79300
14973
7310
14732
57652
181
423435/423441
423493/423443
77251
429864/429862
79007
423744
15362
423479
73101
Electrical
Part No.
429856
419293
79288
71342
76555
79094
79300
14973
7310
14732
57652
181
423435/423441
423443/423443
77251
429864/429862
79007
423744
423575
423878
15362
423479
73101
0.
12
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-8
REV. 3 10-1-02
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
Figure
Description Part No.
Regulated Actuator Assembly 429850
Mounting Box 419293
2 Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Including Regulator 79340
3 Hex Jam Nut 67990
4 Hole Adaptor (2) 423277
5 Lockwasher 69521
6 Gasket 181
7 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly
LT-20-R/101-10 (Ordered Separately) 423429/423439
LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435/423441
Double Tankll0l-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443
LT-A-101-30/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423491/423443
8 Safety Shipping Cap 77251
Label 426953
10 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862
11 Hose Assembly 79007
12 Enclosure Cover (Without Labels) 419294
13 Cover Screw 15362
14 Speed Nut 423479
0
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-9
4-1-06 REV. 4
S ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
4
~
000290
S . ; -0
Figure
2
3
4
5
Description
Enclosure Shipping Assembly
Enclosure
Cover
Nameplate
Screw
Speed Nut
Part No.
429870
419295
419296
429871
15362
423479
0
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-10
REV. 3 10-1-02
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
4
000376
Figure 3.0 Gallon
Description Part No.
- Bracket Shipping Assembly 429878
1 Bracket Assembly -
2 Grommet 14089
3 Grommet 8688
1.4 Wing Nut 12065
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-10.1
7-1-09 REV.4
TANK ASSEMBLY
000375
Figure
Description
- Tank Assembly
1.1 Tank Adaptor Shipping Assembly
2 Pickup Tube Assembly
3 Vent Plug Assembly
4 0-Ring
5 Union Nut
6 Union Tail Piece
7 Burst Disc
8 Shell
9 Nameplate
1.5 Gallon
Part No.
429864
430103
429883
74247
56909
417705
417706
416974
429861
N/A
3.0 Gallon
Part No.
429862
79522
417700
74247
56909
417705
417706
416974
429860
N/A
0
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-10.2
REV. 2 4-1-06
REMOTE RELEASE
12
to
11
4
, 7, 8
Figure
No. Description Part No.
- Remote Release 433485
1 Mounting Box 419295
2 Cover 419296
3 Maintenance Label 17351
4 Spring 79094
5 Speed Nut 423479
6 Machine Screw 14973
7 Hex Nut 14732
8 Lockwasher 7310
9 101 Release 433702
10 Spacer 76555
11 Screw 71342
12 Cover Screw 15362
13 Tension Lever and Bracket Assembly 79300
14 Gasket 181
15 101 Cartridge (Order Separately) (Not Shown) (TC/DOT) 423439
(DOT) 15850
0
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Page 9-11
10-1-02 REV. 5
Procedure: Find the area of the fryer by multiplying the 26 in.
depth x the 28 in. length (66 x 71 cm) which equals
728 sq in. (4697 sq cm). Using the 3N nozzle
(approved for fryers with the longest side of 25 3/8 in.
(64 cm) and a maximum of 370.5 sq in. (2390 sq cm)
in area), divide the total area of 728 sq. in. (4697 sq.
cm) by 370.5 sq in. (2390 sq cm) to find the number
of nozzles needed. 728 sq. in. (4697 sq cm) divided
by 370.5 sq in. (2390 sq cm) per nozzle = 2 nozzles
required. Then verify the maximum longest side
dimension of 25 3/8 in. (64 cm). Doing this will
require doubling the 3N nozzles to = a total of 4
nozzles, if we are to protect the 26 in. (66 cm) depth
and the 28 in. (71 cm) length of the fryer with this 3N
nozzle option. See Figure 1.
Using the same process, but utilizing the 3N nozzle
approved for fryer protection with the longest side of
27 5/8 in. (70 cm) and the maximum of 324 sq in.
(2090 sq cm) in area, the calculation will change to
728 sq in. (4697 sq cm) divided by 324 sq. in. (2090
sq. cm) per nozzle = 3 nozzles. Because this 3N
nozzle option will protect 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) on the
longest side, it will protect the 26 in. (66 cm) side in
this example, thus eliminating the need for extra noz-
zles. Utilizing this option, in this example, will require
a total of 9 flows, but allows less nozzles and less
nozzle drops*. See Figure 1.
*Note: 2-flow appliance nozzles can also be used.
This option requires a total of 4 nozzles (728 sq in.
divided by 210 sq in. per nozzle = 4 nozzles, or 8
total flows). Using this option requires that the noz-
zles be placed over each quadrant of frypot area pro-
tected and aimed to the center of the modules. This
option may be desirable if minimizing total system
flows is important.
93/BIN. 193/BIN. 191/4 4 4
-I — :23.8 cm) (23.8 cm) (23.5
_T
II
I ) 261N. • (66 CM)
HI
28 IN.
(71 cm)
SECOND 3N NOZZLE OPTION
FIGURE 1
002466
Example No. 2 - Fryer With Dripboard. This fryer has an overall
fry vat, including a dripboard, that measures 24 in. (61 cm) in
depth x 20 in. (51 cm) in length. The actual frypot measures 20 in.
x 20 in. (51 cm x 51 cm). Because both the frypot and the overall
fry vat including the dripboard exceed the maximum dimensions
for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required.
Procedure: Divide the fryer cooking area from left to right or from
front to back into modules that do not exceed single
nozzle area limitations and longest side limitations as
described in the table for "Fryer Multiple Nozzle
Protection" located in the Design Section.
The example fryer can either be divided from left to
right into two modules, each measuring 10 in. x 24 in.
(25.4 cm x 61 cm), or it can be divided from front to
back. See Figure 2.
If the fryer is divided from front to back, two 2-flow
nozzles may be adequate. To determine this, first
protect as much of the rear portion of the vat (the fry-
pot area) that is allowed with 2-flow appliance noz-
zles using the maximum area of 210 sq in. (1355
sq cm) per nozzle with the maximum longest side of
21 in. (53 cm) for multiple nozzles. See Figure 2.
In the example, the frypot is 20 in. (51 cm) from side
to side. Use the maximum area of 210 sq in. (1355
sq cm) allowed for one nozzle and divide it by 20 in.
(51 cm), a total of 10 1/2 in. (27 cm) of the frypot can
be protected with one 2-flow nozzle (210 sq in. divid-
ed by 20 in. = 10.5 in.). See Figure 2.
This leaves the remainder of 9 1/2 in. (24 cm) of frypot
and the entire dripboard yet to protect. One 2-flow
appliance nozzle will protect up to 10 1/2 in. (27 cm) of
frypot, therefore, there is no need to verify the remain-
ing 9 1/2 in. (24 cm). There is only the overall of 9 1/2
in. (24 cm) remaining plus the dripboard to verify.
The dripboard measures 4 in. x 20 in. (10 cm x 51
cm), with an overall remainder of frypot + dripboard
area size of 13 1/2 in. x20 in. (34cmx51 cm) = 270
sq in. (1742 sq cm). Reviewing the "Multiple Nozzle
Fryer Table," a 2-flow appliance nozzle can protect an
area, including dripboard, of 294 sq in. (1897 sq cm)
with a longest side of 21 in. (53 cm). Because the
area is less than the maximum of 294 sq in. (1897 sq
cm) and the longest side is less than the maximum
of 21 in. (53 cm), a 2-flow nozzle will be sufficient.
See Figure 2.
Adding the protection required for the back of the fry-
pot to the front protection requires two 2-flow appli-
ance nozzles as a minimum. See Figure 2.
(51 cm)
-I 20 IN.
(51 cm)
10 1/2 IN. T.Hr _ _ J (27 cm)
20 IN.
(51 cm) I 24 IN. ------ - 24 IN.
(61 cm) 9 1/2 IN. (61 cm)
(24 cm)
I 10 IN. I
4 IN. I254 cm) 4 IN. (10 cm)
(10 cm)
DIVIDED LEFT TO RIGHT DIVIDED FRONT TO BACK
FIGURE 2
002467
14 IN.
(35.6 cm)
13 IN.
(33 cm) • S 1
--
26 IN.
t (66 cm)
I •
281N. 4 (71 cm)
FIRST 3N NOZZLE OPTION
S ,"Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Calculation Examples
Example No. 1 - Donut Fryer Without Dripboard. This fryer has
a frypot that measures 26 in. in depth x 28 in. in length (66 x 71
cm). Because the frypot exceeds the maximum dimensions for
one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required.
..$ •I.• I -
ff _
AUTOMAN 1, TYPICAL FOR ADDITIONAL
AUTOMANs-UPTO4
1J IX APPENIiIX
U1'3'470 ULCEX3470 Page -12
7-1-09
WIRING AGRAM
NJffPA standards require simultaneous operation for fire suppres- In the,
-
case of multiple hoods sharing a common exhaust duct,
sidyteñis when two or more hazards can be simultaneously NFPA 17A requires one of two forms of simultaneous operation.
involved in fire by reason of their proximity. To accomplish simulta- The folldwing wiring diagrams (See Figures 3 and 4) identify two
neus ópëration, the 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN Regulated principle uses for the 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN Regulated
Isë Assembly can be used. This release can be activated Release Assembly. Refer to Components Section, Page 3-1,
indepèhdently by fusible line operation exactly like the mechanicalS Figure 3.
version and can also be triggered electrically using a snap action
• Simultaneous operation of all independent hood, duct, and switch from another 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN Regulated appliance proteàtion systems. See Figure 3. Release Assembly or a Mechanical AUTOMAN Regulated
Release Assembly. The electrical wiring used to connect from one 2. Sirnulfaneous operation of any hood, duct, and appliance pro-
AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly to another will not be tection system and the system(s) protecting the entire common
supervised. However, NFPA 96 allows an exception for electrically exhaust duct. See Figure 4.
operated systems which "include automatic mechanical detection
(fusible link) and actuation as a backup detection system."
$imultaneous Actuation of Multiple 120 VAC Electric ANSULAUTOMANs
DUAL ELECTRIC
SWITCH, PART
NO. 423879
115 VAC
- 60 HZ
ALL SYSTEMS MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE HOT
NEUTRAL
0
FIGURE 3
008405
SECTION IX..
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470 Pe13..
7-1-09 :
PK . WIRING DIAGRAM . .
Simultaneous Actuation of One (1) or More 120 VAC Electric ANSUL AUTOMANs from Multiple Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMA?1t
LL SYSTEMS MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE . 12A
I'4
MECHANICAL
AUTOMAN,
$ KA
ELECTRIC ELECTRIC
AUTOMAN AUTOMAN ' 2
,
SWITCH, PART NO.
423678
It lift NA NA -
NEUTRAL
L_. ....J ACTUATION SOLENOID •. • - • .
FIGURE4
OO846. . Note 1 For fusible link detection only.
Note 2 Use ANSUL AUTOMANs with solenoid and electric switch Replace Single electric Switch Part No 423878 with Dual Switch Kit'.Part No
423879. •.: ;-, , •.
Note 3 See Installation section of this manual for power capacity of solenoid iird Switches
Note 4: This method does not provide supervision for battery or system wiring. The authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) may waive 'this requirement. •,
Note 5: When any one of the Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMANs is activated, th&miaroswitch will transfer to the N.O. position, completing'the circuit to /
the N.C. switch in the Electrical ANSUL AUTOMAN. This will activate the ANSUL AUTOMAN. When the ANSUL AUTOMAN fires, theN.C.
switch transfers to the N.O. position, opening the circuit to the solenoid.
SECTION IX - APPENDIX
UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-14
REV. 0 7-1-09
NOTES: o
kf
4
- .-
4
It Xt
S •,
-
- S-4•
,
VX
-4.ML - - - -4.
17 ;
Ail
-
mk
JL
4.
A
-
j-
S .4,
.-
.4
8c n~ 90 1 7
£fft9 78tPB0ED 7J1V /ff 1x7or go. DV?O 09 BzB&'tDoo
(Ow) S7C3 QwQ
Job CH3ECAV AC1O--1 Job unc_________
job jrrj £ L. '' - TVPZ of Systn: Ansul R-102 N"
Ansu5 Pitha U
i7LAJ VN'1 IUS Ccive CORE 0
Pgo Chn 1]
GZ=
V PUR12 evoyam. 0 UMC. L I II
---
Cot3y WOM2 f-Fe Svtem tn System ode_________
Address PQ Ekn 13278 Sn Ino CA fl4 FllE—COPY
Shut 02 Device Gas fce: LIechr=75ccl El EteMeel El Size
vstL Tested cn srt rcer
Ddo
Mft Fire SIr TCOOfl Sfitem is InsWEed in ccccrtftnie 1h the cturi's I onzotomo and
o, E5PA 90 md 17 (cote2 ooaza) ctd di cpobe stcle cnd 1=5 codes. Jfl et2iol
mea or izwri p4slbmtad by oteo to contjz!e the histaftftn of Uds sown has tt=j ccttca
to the thoe cre toeJ bow. (Use bcth of shec-2 if eoocvy)
670.4,01
Siinc2ure ..
Czts 0g3
I have re,ei o copy off the FIre Suppression Syotein Oter'z M. onuaI and I und=tend it. Iclo
trnderotcnd thct 12 in the recenrnmdation of the [ctkrnd Fire Protection Associstan (PA) thc2
M3
8
yter 11 acted aii rnoth to mabtatn Ito rab!It
Sncure Z- / Date, q// 9
Hou'O rg Jo
Funthcnl toots hcre b= ttneoed ond the cytcrn peformo as
ku Judktton is' IT)
-_
Dzte /i&Ii